Return to Main Form

Return to Service Form

Exit Program

Di250f/Di350f
SERVICE MANUAL

Safety Precautions for Inspection and Service

When performing inspection and service procedures, observe the following precautions to prevent accidents and ensure utmost safety. Depending on the model, some of the precautions given in the following do not apply. Different markings are used to denote specific meanings as detailed below.

WARNING CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

The following graphic symbols are used to give instructions that need to be observed. Used to call the service technicians attention to what is graphically represented inside the marking (including a warning). Used to prohibit the service technicians from doing what is graphically represented inside the marking. Used to instruct the service technicians to do what is graphically represented inside the marking.

WARNING
1. Always observe precautions. Parts requiring special attention in this product will include a label containing the mark shown on the left plus precautionary notes. Be sure to observe the precautions. Be sure to observe the Safety Information given in the Operators Manual. 2. Before starting the procedures, be sure to unplug the power cord. This product contains a high-voltage unit and a circuit with a large current capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn. The product also contains parts that can jerk suddenly and cause injury. If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or blindness. 3. Use the specified parts. For replacement parts, always use the genuine parts specified in the manufacturers parts manual. Installing a wrong or unauthorized part could cause dielectric breakdown, overload, or undermine safety devices resulting in possible electric shock or fire. Replace a blown electrical fuse or thermal fuse with its corresponding genuine part specified in the manufacturers parts manual. Installing a fuse of a different make or rating could lead to a possible fire. If a thermal fuse blows frequently, the temperature control system may have a problem and action must be taken to eliminate the cause of the problem.

P-1

4. Handle the power cord with care and never use a multiple outlet. Do not break, crush or otherwise damage the power cord. Placing a heavy object on the power cord, or pulling or bending it may damage it, resulting in a possible fire or electric shock. Do not use a multiple outlet to which any other appliance or machine is connected. Be sure the power outlet meets or exceeds the specified capacity. 5. Be careful with the high-voltage parts. A part marked with the symbol shown on the left carries a high voltage. Touching it could result in an electric shock or burn. Be sure to unplug the power cord before servicing this part or the parts near it. 6. Do not work with wet hands. Do not unplug or plug in the power cord, or perform any kind of service or inspection with wet hands. Doing so could result in an electric shock.

7. Do not touch a high-temperature part. A part marked with the symbol shown on the left and other parts such as the exposure lamp and fusing roller can be very hot while the machine is energized. Touching them may result in a burn. Wait until these parts have cooled down before replacing them or any surrounding parts. 8. Maintain a grounded connection at all times. (This item may not apply in the USA.) Be sure to connect the ground wire to the ground terminal even when performing an inspection or repair. Without proper grounding, electrical leakage could result in an electric shock or fire. Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, telephone ground wire, or a lightning conductor. 9. Do not remodel the product. Modifying this product in a manner not authorized by the manufacturer may result in a fire or electric shock. If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or blindness. 10. Restore all parts and harnesses to their original positions. To promote safety and prevent product damage, make sure the harnesses are returned to their original positions and properly secured in their clamps and saddles in order to avoid hot parts, high-voltage parts, sharp edges, or being crushed. To promote safety, make sure that all tubing and other insulating materials are returned to their original positions. Make sure that floating components mounted on the circuit boards are at their correct distance and position off the boards.

P-2

CAUTION
1. Precautions for Service Jobs A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled. Omitting them may result in contact failure which could cause an electric shock or fire. When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) are used in the correct places. Using the wrong screw could lead to stripped threads, poorly secured parts, poor insulating or grounding, and result in a malfunction, electric shock or injury. Take great care to avoid personal injury from possible burrs and sharp edges on the parts, frames and chassis of the product. When moving the product or removing an option, use care not to injure your back or allow your hands to be caught in mechanisms. 2. Precautions for Servicing with Covers and Parts Removed Wherever feasible, keep all parts and covers mounted when energizing the product. If energizing the product with a cover removed is absolutely unavoidable, do not touch any exposed live parts and use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in the moving parts. Never leave a product in this condition unattended. Never place disassembled parts or a container of liquid on the product. Parts falling into, or the liquid spilling inside, the mechanism could result in an electric shock or fire. Never use a flammable spray near the product. This could result in a fire. Make sure the power cord is unplugged before removing or installing circuit boards or plugging in or unplugging connectors. Always use the interlock switch actuating jig to actuate an interlock switch when a cover is opened or removed. The use of folded paper or some other object may damage the interlock switch mechanism, possibly resulting in an electric shock, injury or blindness. 3. Precautions for the Working Environment The product must be placed on a flat, level surface that is stable and secure. Never place this product or its parts on an unsteady or tilting workbench when servicing. Provide good ventilation at regular intervals if a service job must be done in a confined space for a long period of time. Avoid dusty locations and places exposed to oil or steam. Avoid working positions that may block the ventilation ports of the product. 4. Precautions for Handling Batteries (Lithium, Nickel-Cadmium, etc.) Replace a rundown battery with the same type as specified in the manufacturers parts manual. Before installing a new battery, make sure of the correct polarity of the installation or the battery could burst. Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations. Never dispose of them at the users premises or attempt to try to discharge one.

P-3

5. Precautions for the Laser Beam (Only for Products Employing a Laser) Removing the cover marked with the following caution label could lead to possible exposure to the laser beam, resulting in eye damage or blindness. Be sure to unplug the power cord before removing this cover. If removing this cover while the power is ON is unavoidable, be sure to wear protective laser goggles that meet specifications. Make sure that no one enters the room when the machine is in this condition. When handling the laser unit, observe the Precautions for Handling Laser Equipment.

1167P001AA

DANGER
Invisible laser radiation when open.

VOID DIREC O BEM

EPOSRE
094-12-01 1144D20

P-4

Other Precautions
To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. While the product is energized, do not unplug or plug connectors into the circuit boards or harnesses. The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube. An air gun and vacuum cleaner generates a strong electrostatic charge that can destroy the ATDC sensor and other sensors. Before cleaning a component with one of these devices, be sure to remove all the sensors. Otherwise, use a blower brush and cloth when cleaning parts. When handling circuit boards with MOS ICs, observe the INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs (applicable only to the products using MOS ICs). The PC Drum is a very delicate component. Observe the precautions given in HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM because mishandling may result in serious image problems. Note that replacement of a circuit board may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items, or software installation. After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring and screws are returned to their original positions. Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of repair. Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a damaged hopper motor or locking mechanism. If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in the locked position.

P-5

Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen hnlichen typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. France ATTENTION Ily a danger dexplosion sily a remplacement incorrec de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du meme type ou dun type quivalent recommande par le constructueur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. Denmark ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. Sweden VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Finland VAROlTUS Paristo voi rjht, los se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

P-6

PRECAUTIONS FOR SERVICE

When performing inspection and service procedures, observe the following precautions to prevent mishandling of the machine and its parts. Depending on the model, some of the precautions given in the following do not apply.

Precautions Before Service

When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads. Never disturb the LAN by breaking or making a network connection, altering termination, installing or removing networking hardware or software, or shutting down networked devices without the knowledge and express permission of the network administrator or the shop supervisor.

How to Use this Book

1. DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. 2. TROUBLESHOOTING If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the text only instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedures applicable within the defective unit. All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions. The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

Precautions for Service

Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of repair. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or damaged. After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring and screws are returned to their original positions. Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a damaged motor or locking mechanism. If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in the locked position. Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.

PS-1

Precautions for Dis/Reassembly

Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier. The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly. If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears. Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet. Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed. Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the PWB or connect or disconnect the PWB connectors while power is being supplied to the copier. Never use flammable sprays near the copier. A battery (lithium, nickel-cadmium, etc.) is used in this machine. Do not charge or short circuit it and make sure of the correct polarity at replacement. A used battery should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be discarded casually or left unattended at the user's premises. When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) and toothed washer are used in the correct places. If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to change without notice.

Precautions for Circuit Inspection

Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed circuit. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be sure to use the GND wire.

PS-2

Handling of PWBs
1. During Transportation/Storage: During transportation or when in storage, new P .W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed from their protective conductive bags. Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight and high temperature. When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity. Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands. Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged. 2. During Inspection/Replacement: Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool. Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the outlet. When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board. When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch a metal part to discharge static electricity before touching the PWB. Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.

Handling of Other Parts

The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube.

PS-3

Handling of the PC Drum

Only for Products Not Employing an Imaging Cartridge. 1. During Transportation/Storage: Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum. The storage temperature is in the range between 20C and +40C. In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time. 2. Handling: Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used. Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its carton or protect it with a Drum Cloth. The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, fingerprints, and other foreign matter. Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum. If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure. 1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its carton.

1076D001

1076D002

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad. A. Turn the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is present is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in one continuous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum. B. Turn the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly exposed surface area with a CLEAN face of the Dust-Free Cotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thoroughly cleaned. At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry Dust-Free Cotton Pad until no toner is evident on the face of the Pad after wiping.

PS-4

3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cotton Pad which has been folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one continuous movement from its rear edge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times. Never move the Pad back and forth.
1076D003

4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the procedure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been wiped. Always OVERLAP the areas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropriate for cleaning.

1076D004

NOTES Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface. Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under interior illumination. If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.

Handling of the Imaging Cartridge

Only for Products Employing an Imaging Cartridge. 1. During Transportation/Storage: The storage temperature is in the range between 20C and +40C. In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time. 2. Handling: Store the Imaging Cartridge in a place that is not exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge: Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, fingerprints, and other foreign matter. Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.

PS-5

SAFETY INFORMATION
Laser Safety
This is a digital machine which prints by means of a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the laser, provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual. Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. This machine is certified as a Class 1 product. This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. CAUTION: The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Because of this, Minolta strongly recommends that you operate your copy machine only as described in this documentation.

Internal Laser Radiation

Maximum Average Radiation Power: 36.7W at laser aperture of the print head unit Wavelength: 770-810nm This product employs a Class IIIb Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head unit. The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances. Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit

This figure shows the view inside the Right Side Door with the Imaging Unit removed.

CDRH regulation This copier is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 3 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. CAUTION: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5mW and the wavelength is 770-810nm.

Laser Safety Label

A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the copy machine as shown below.

Manufacturers Name Plate and Laser safety label

The Manufacturers Name Plate is affixed at the position illustrated above. Please write down the Model Name and Serial No. of your copier here. Model: Serial No.:

Label inside copy machine

The following laser safety label will be attached inside the copy machine as shown below. Please read the following for your own protection.

Caution Opening the cover indicated by the Caution label may expose you to harmful laser radiation which could cause damage or loss of eyesight. Do not open the cover when the power is on.

Service Precautions
(1) Precautions Refer to DISASSEMBLY/CLEANING for the Disassembly procedure. 1. When unplugging connectors on the P.W.B.s themselves, always make sure the power is OFF first. Be sure to unplug the copier before disassembling and cleaning. 2. Always unplug connectors by holding the connector housing. Pulling on the wires can lead to problems with poor contact. 3. It is recommended that a body ground not be used when carrying out any troubleshooting procedure. Be sure to ground DC lines to a ground test point on the P.W.B. (2) At Replacement/Adjustment/Cleaning 1. Be sure to handle the Fusing Unit carefully. It remains hot a while after the copier is turned off. 2. Do not disassemble the Imaging Cartridge or Print Head Unit. 3. Do not expose the PC Drum of the Imaging Cartridge to direct sunlight or to room lighting for more than 5 minutes. 4. Turn off the power before removing the Print Head Unit to protect the eyes from possible exposure to the laser beam. 5. Use only a Fuse of the indicated rating. (3) During Operation 1. Keep your hands, clothing, etc. well away from operating or rotating parts. 2. Never touch the terminals of electrical parts or high voltage parts. 3. This copier uses an invisible laser beam. To prevent a laser beam leak, the copier performs a trial run to make sure the covers are in position.

Handling the P.W.B.s

Observe the following precautions when handling a P.W.B. with ICs. (1) During Transportation/Storage 1. During transport and storage, P.W.B.s should be kept in conductive bags or on mats and not taken out unless absolutely necessary. 2. P .W.B.s should be stored in a place where direct sunlight does not strike them. 3. Do not touch IC terminals with your hands. (2) At Replacement 1. Before removing connectors from a P.W.B., make sure the copier has been unplugged. 2. When P.W.B.s are taken out of their conductive bags or off their mats, hold them by their edges to avoid touching the terminals or the patterned surfaces. 3. Before installing connectors on a P .W.B., make sure the copier has been unplugged.

INDEX Chapter 1 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS Chapter 2 STRUCTURE Chapter 3 OPERATION Chapter 4 REPORTS Chapter 5 SETUP FOR FAX OPTION Chapter 6 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT Chapter 7 CHECK Chapter 8 MAINTENANCE FEATURE Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING

CONTENTS
Chapter 1 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS
1-1. 1-2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................... 1- 1 1-1-1. FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 1- 1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS.................................................................................... 1- 5

Chapter 2 STRUCTURE
2-1. 2-2. 2-3. NAME OF UNITS .......................................................................................... 2- 1 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE, NAME OF PARTS .......................................... 2- 2 CONFIGURATION OF COPIER ................................................................... 2- 4

Chapter 3 OPERATION
3-1. CIRCUITRY OPERATION ............................................................................. 3- 1 3-1-1. FUNCTION OF PKG .......................................................................... 3- 2 <<1>> MFB Board ............................................................................. 3- 2 <<2>> HGB Board ............................................................................. 3- 7 <<3>> CCD Board ............................................................................. 3- 9 <<4>> INV for Reading...................................................................... 3-10 <<5>> OPE UNIT .............................................................................. 3-11 <<6>> ACR Board ............................................................................. 3-12 <<7>> BCR Board ............................................................................. 3-12 <<8>> EMU Board............................................................................. 3-13 <<9>> ROT Board ............................................................................. 3-13 <<10>> TMEM Board ........................................................................ 3-14 <<11>> NCUK Board ........................................................................ 3-15 <<12>> MPK Board........................................................................... 3-16 OPERATION OF MECHANICAL PARTS ...................................................... 3-18 3-2-1. BOOK SCANNER UNIT (IR SECTION) ............................................ 3-18 <<1>> Image Processing Flow .......................................................... 3-19 <<2>> Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism ............................................................................. 3-20 <<3>> Original Size Detection Timing ............................................... 3-21 <<4>> Original Size Detection........................................................... 3-22 3-2-2. OPERATION OF COPIER.................................................................. 3-24 <<1>> Copying process..................................................................... 3-24 <<2>> Drive system........................................................................... 3-26 <<3>> Operating sequence ............................................................... 3-27 <<4>> Image stabilization system ..................................................... 3-30 3-2-3. IMAGING CARTRIDGE (I/C).............................................................. 3-31 <<1>> I/C Drive Mechanism .............................................................. 3-32 <<2>> Identification and Life of I/C.................................................... 3-32 3-2-4. PC DRUM........................................................................................... 3-33 3-2-5. DRUM CHARGING ............................................................................ 3-34 3-2-6. ERASE LAMP..................................................................................... 3-35 3-2-7. PH SECTION...................................................................................... 3-36

3-2.

3-3.

<<1>> PH Components ..................................................................... 3-37 <<2>> Laser Emission Timing (SOS Signal) ..................................... 3-38 3-2-8. DEVELOPING UNIT........................................................................... 3-39 <<1>> Sleeve/Magnet Roller ............................................................. 3-40 <<2>> Developing Bias ..................................................................... 3-41 <<3>> ATDC Sensor ......................................................................... 3-42 <<4>> Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism......................... 3-43 <<5>> Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism ................... 3-44 <<6>> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism ....................... 3-45 <<7>> I/C Cooling Fan Motor ............................................................ 3-46 <<8>> Ozone Fan Motor ................................................................... 3-46 3-2-9. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION ................................................... 3-47 <<1>> MP Cassette Paper Lifting Plate ............................................ 3-47 <<2>> MP Cassette-in-Position Detection......................................... 3-48 <<3>> MP Cassette Paper Empty Detection..................................... 3-49 <<4>> MP Cassette Paper Size Detection ........................................ 3-50 <<5>> Paper Take-Up Mechanism.................................................... 3-51 <<6>> Manual Bypass Tray............................................................... 3-51 <<7>> Paper Take-Up Retry Mechanism .......................................... 3-52 3-2-10. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS.......................................................... 3-53 <<1>> Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism/Control ................... 3-53 <<2>> Paper Dust Remove ............................................................. 3-54 3-2-11. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................ 3-55 3-2-12. PC DRUM PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS.................................... 3-56 3-2-13. PC DRUM CLEANING...................................................................... 3-57 3-2-14. FUSING UNIT................................................................................... 3-58 <<1>> Drive Mechanism .................................................................. 3-59 <<2>> Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism.................................... 3-59 <<3>> Fusing Temperature Control................................................. 3-60 <<4>> CPM Control ......................................................................... 3-61 3-2-15. PAPER EXIT UNIT ........................................................................... 3-62 3-2-16. FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR .................................................... 3-63 3-2-17. POWER UNIT COOLING FAN MOTOR........................................... 3-64 SYSTEM CONTROL ...................................................................................... 3-65 3-3-1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL.......................................................... 3-65 <<1>> Communication Mode ............................................................ 3-67 <<2>> Encoding Method ................................................................... 3-67 3-3-2. SELECTING PAPER .......................................................................... 3-68 <<1>> Printing Area........................................................................... 3-68 <<2>> Printing Mode ......................................................................... 3-68 <<3>> Paper Selection Mode (facsimile).......................................... 3-69

Chapter 4 REPORTS
4-1. 4-2. LIST OF REPORTS ....................................................................................... 4HOW TO READ DATA OF REPORTS .......................................................... 44-2-1. ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) ................................................................... 44-2-2. ACTIVITY REPORT (RX) .................................................................. 41 2 2 3

ii

4-2-3. G3 PROTOCOL TRACE .................................................................... 4- 4 4-2-4. MEMORY DUMP & FILE DUMP ........................................................ 4- 4 4-2-5. SERVICE CALL REPORT.................................................................. 4- 5

Chapter 5 SETUP FOR FAX OPTION

5-1. 5-2. CONNECT THE PHONE CABLES ................................................................ 5OPTIONAL PRODUCTS SETUP ................................................................... 55-2-1. OPTIONAL MEMORY BOARD .......................................................... 55-2-2. TX (TRANSMISSION) MARKER........................................................ 55-2-3. G3 MULTI-PORT................................................................................ 51 2 2 4 6

Chapter 6 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT

6-1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 6- 1 6-1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............... 6- 1 6-1-2. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT .......... 6- 1 6-1-3. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBS WITH MOS ICS ...... 6- 2 6-1-4. HANDLING OF THE IMAGING CARTRIDGE .................................... 6- 2 6-1-5. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED ...................................... 6- 3 <<1>> Red Painted Screws............................................................... 6- 3 <<2>> Variable Resistors on Board................................................... 6- 3 <<3>> Other Screws.......................................................................... 6- 3 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY .................................................................... 6- 4 6-2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES ....................................................... 6- 4 6-2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPOMENTS ................................................................................. 6- 7 6-2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTION....................................... 6-10 <<1>> Replacement of the Paper Take-Up Roll................................ 6-10 <<2 >> Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover.............................. 6-10 <<3>> Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover..................................... 6-11 <<4>> Cleaning of the Side Cover .................................................... 6-11 <<5>> Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Cover ......................................... 6-11 6-2-4. OPTICAL SECTION ........................................................................... 6-12 <<1>> Removal of the IR Unit ........................................................... 6-12 <<2>> Removal of the PH Unit .......................................................... 6-13 <<3>> Removal of the CCD Unit ....................................................... 6-15 <<4>> Cleaning of the Scanner Rails/Bushings ................................ 6-15 <<5>> Cleaning of the Mirrors ........................................................... 6-16 <<6>> Cleaning of the Lens .............................................................. 6-16 <<7>> Cleaning of the Original Glass................................................ 6-16 <<8>> Removal of the Scanner......................................................... 6-16 <<9>> Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables ................................... 6-18 <<10>> Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables .................................. 6-19 6-2-5. IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION........................................................... 6-23 <<1>> Removal of the Image Transfer Roller ................................... 6-23 <<2>> Cleaning of the Comb Electrode ............................................ 6-23 <<3>> Cleaning of the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate ................... 6-24

6-2.

iii

6-3.

6-4.

<<4>> Replacement of the Ozone Filter............................................ 6-24 6-2-6. DEVELOPING SECTION ................................................................... 6-25 <<1>> Removal of the Imaging Cartridge.......................................... 6-25 6-2-7. FUSING SECTION ............................................................................. 6-26 <<1>> Removal of the Fusing Unit .................................................... 6-26 <<2>> Removal of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp, Fusing Right Roller, Fusing Left Roller, Fusing Roller Thermistor, Fusing Roller Thermostat, and Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse......6-26 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................... 6-29 6-3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED.......................................... 6-29 6-3-2. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION .................................................. 6-30 6-3-3. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................... 6-31 MISCELLANEOUS......................................................................................... 6-33 6-4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE KEY COUNTER SOCKET (OPTION)........ 6-33 6-4-2. REMOUNTING THE EEPROM (IC3A)............................................... 6-34

Chapter 7 CHECK
7-1. 7-2. CHECK LIST .................................................................................................. 7- 1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT........................................................................... 7- 2

Chaper 8 MAINTENANCE FEATURE

8-1. 8-2. 8-3. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 8- 1 MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATION PROCEDURES................ 8- 2 DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATIONS ........ 8- 4 8-3-1. START-UP.......................................................................................... 8- 4 8-3-2. INITIALIZATION ................................................................................. 8- 7 <<1>> Port/Line ................................................................................. 8- 7 <<2>> TX Marker............................................................................... 8- 7 <<3>> RAM Clear.............................................................................. 8- 8 <<4>> All Clear.................................................................................. 8- 9 <<5>> Serial Number, Time and Date Setting, and Instalation Date........................................................................................ 8-10 <<6>> Touch Panel Position Adjustment .......................................... 8-12 8-3-3. MAINTENANCE MODE...................................................................... 8-13 <<1>> Memory Contents ................................................................... 8-13 <<2>> Memory Dump........................................................................ 8-13 <<3>> File Display............................................................................. 8-14 <<4>> File Dump ............................................................................... 8-15 <<5>> Soft Set................................................................................... 8-16 <<6>> File Forward ........................................................................... 8-16 8-3-4. SERVICE CHOICE............................................................................. 8-17 <<1>> System Input .......................................................................... 8-18 <<2>> ADFR Adjustment (2 sided ADF) ........................................... 8-21 <<3>> Printer Adjustment .................................................................. 8-22 8-3-5. SYSTEM INPUT ................................................................................. 8-25 <<1>> Paper Size Input..................................................................... 8-25 <<2>> Change Fixed Zoom............................................................... 8-27

iv

8-4.

<<3>> Machine Configuration ........................................................... 8-27 <<4>> Serial Number ........................................................................ 8-28 <<5>> Permit Imaging unit ................................................................ 8-28 <<6>> Original size detecting option ................................................. 8-28 8-3-6. COUNTER.......................................................................................... 8-29 <<1>> Paper Counter ........................................................................ 8-29 <<2>> Jam Counter........................................................................... 8-31 <<3>> PM Counter ............................................................................ 8-33 <<4>> Trouble Counter ..................................................................... 8-35 <<5>> Device Counter....................................................................... 8-37 <<6>> Maintenance Counter ............................................................. 8-38 8-3-7. FUNCTION ......................................................................................... 8-39 <<1>> [F1] - Paper feed test without printing .................................... 8-40 <<2>> [F2] - Specification of output values for each HV ................... 8-40 <<3>> [F8] - Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor........................ 8-41 <<4>> [F12] - Printing pre-determined test patterns.......................... 8-42 8-3-8. I/O CHECK ......................................................................................... 8-42 8-3-9. MOVEMENT CHECK ......................................................................... 8-51 8-3-10. ROM VERSION ............................................................................... 8-54 8-3-11. LEVEL HISTORY............................................................................. 8-54 8-3-12. FAX SETTING ................................................................................. 8-55 <<1>> Setting the service call.......................................................... 8-55 <<2>> Terminal transmission .......................................................... 8-60 8-3-13. ADJUSTMENT FEATURES ............................................................ 8-62 <<1>> Printer Adjustment ................................................................ 8-62 <<2>> Scanner Adjustment ............................................................. 8-67 <<3>> Document Size Detection ..................................................... 8-76 SOFT SWITCH LIST ...................................................................................... 8-79 8-4-1. SOFT SWITCHES DISCLOSED TO USERS..................................... 8-79 8-4-2. LIST OF DEFAULTS .......................................................................... 8-83 8-4-3. LIST OF SOFT SWITCHES ............................................................... 8-94

Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
9-1. DIAGNOSIS BY ALARM CODE..................................................................... 9- 1 9-1-1. COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES................................................. 9- 2 9-1-2. PRINTER ALARMS (MALFUNCTION)............................................... 9-10 <<1>> Detection Timing by Malfunction Code................................... 9-10 <<2>> Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code ................ 9-14 DIAGNOSIS OF DOCUMENT MISFEED ...................................................... 9-31 9-2-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED ................................................................... 9-31 9-2-2. SENSOR FAILURE ............................................................................ 9-31 DIAGNOSIS OF PRINTER MISFEED ........................................................... 9-33 9-3-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED ................................................................... 9-33 9-3-2. ELECTRICAL MISFEED .................................................................... 9-34 9-3-3. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE (INCLUDING OPTIONAL PARTS) ............................................................................................. 9-35 <<1>> Paper Misfeed ........................................................................ 9-35

9-2.

9-3.

9-4. 8-5.

9-6.

9-7.

9-8. 9-9.

DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOMS ........................................................................ 9-70 CHECKPOINTS FOR TROUBLE IN ANALOG UNITS .................................. 9-87 <<1>> Printer Signal Waveform ........................................................ 9-87 <<2>> Communication Analog Signal Waveform .............................. 9-87 <<3>> Image Memory Backup Signal Waveform .............................. 9-89 WARM RESTART .......................................................................................... 9-90 <<1>> Overview ................................................................................ 9-90 <<2>> How to Operate Warm Restart ............................................... 9-90 <<3>> Warm Restart Steps ............................................................... 9-90 CLEARING RAM UNCONDITIONALLY......................................................... 9-91 <<1>> OvervieW................................................................................ 9-91 <<2>> Operation of Unconditional RAM Clear .................................. 9-91 <<3>> Steps of Unconditional RAM Clear......................................... 9-91 LOW-SPEED MODE SELECTING SWITCH ................................................. 9-92 IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS ...................................................................... 9-93

vi

Chapter 1

BASIC SPECIFICATIONS

1-1. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

1-1-1. FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS
L : Lengthwise, C : Crosswise Di250f / Di350f Facsimile type Scanning document size Console type transceiver ADF : Width 128 - 297 mm, Length 100 - 1000/4000 mm BOOK : 11x17" max ADFR : 11x17" max Capacity : ADF-70 sheets, ADFR - 50 sheets Automatic document feed Scanning method Detectable size (Detection by main scanning width) Scanning rate (without zooming) Max.size : 11x17" Transport : Take-up face up, Exit face down Flat surface scanning with super high resolution image sensor (CCD) ADF : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, 5.5x8.5" L / C BOOK : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, No document (option :5.5x8.5" L, A3L, A4L/C, FLS, B5C, B4L) ADFR : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, Mixed Original Detection ADF & ADFR: Di250f 25 sheets/min. (LTR C copy) Di350f 35 sheets/min. (LTR C copy)

1-1

Di250f / Di350f Multi purpose cassette (standard) Papers size & Capacity Capacity Size Type : 250 sheets max. (80g/m2) : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C, 5.5x8.5" C,User Set (Automatic detection) : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2 Special paper Add-on Universal cassette Capacity Size Type Capacity Size Type Capacity Size Type : 250 sheets max. (80g/m2) : 11x17" L, 11x14" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C 5.5x8.5" C, User Set (Dial setting) : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2 : 500 sheets max. (80g/m2) : 11x17" L, 11x14" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C A3L, B4L, A4L/C (Maintenance menu setting) : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2 : 2500 sheets max. (80g/m2) : 8.5x11" L/C only : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2 91-157 g/m2 Postcard, OHP , Label (20 sheets max.)

Add-on 500 sheet cassette (fixed)

Large capacity cabinet

Single manual feed (standard) Capacity : 1 sheet Size : Crosswise 3.5 to 11.75" Lengthwise 5.5 to 17 " Type : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2 : Special paper 91-157 g/m2 Standard : Face down stack, 500 sheets max. (LTR C, 80g/m2) Paper Finishing Recording method Recording rate warm-up time Rotate print 2-Sided print Option : Finisher, Mail-bin finisher, Job tray unit, Shift tray unit (Di250f only)

Electrophotographic recording (PPC) Di250f :25 sheets/min. (LTR C), Di350f : 35 sheets/min. (LTR C) Di250f :60 sec., Yes (standard) Yes (Di250f : option, Di350f : standard) Di350f :70 sec.

Recording resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 16x15.4 mm automatically selectable

1-2

Di250f / Di350f Copy magnification Arbitrary : 25 - 400 % (0.1 % step) Fixed : 2.000/1.545/1.294/1.214/1.0/0.930/0.785/0.733/ 0.647/0.500 Communication magnification 70 - 100 % (Regular size) auto/stepwise 70 - 100 % (1% step) full automatic Di250f : Less than 5.9 sec., Di350f : Less than 4.7 sec. (Specification of first copy timing is obtained with 1st drawer, LTR C paper, and BOOK scan) 600 dpi scanning / 600 dpi printing 16 MB G3/ECM : 8x3.85 line/mm, 8x7.7 line/mm, 8x15.4 line/mm, 16x15.4 line/mm G3/ECM : 33.6Kbps - 2.4Kbps G3/ECM : Image signal 2 sec. approx. (V.34 JBIG) MH / MR / MMR / JBIG G3/ECM : Phone line 120V, 60 Hz While idling Power saving mode Power consumption : 190 W approx. : Less than 45 W (International Energy Star will be met)

Size reduction/ enlargement

First copy speed

Copy resolution Memory capacity Scanning resolution (main line x feed line) Data speed Transmission time Coding method Applicable network Power

Communication mode ECM/G3

Max power consumption : Di250f : 1000 W approx. Di350f : 1200 W approx. Physical dimensions W: 566mm (Di250f) / 616mm (Di350f) , D: 707mm, H: 635mm (no options) Di250f : 53.5kg Weight of main copier Di350f : 55.5kg

Noise level

While idling : Di250f Less than 47 dB (A) Di350f Less than 50 dB (A) While operating: Di250f Less than 69 dB (A) Di350f Less than 71 dB (A)

1-3

: available Options Optional memory board Add-on drawer Universal cassette (250 sheets) 500-sheet cassette Large capacity cabinet (2500 sheets) 2 sided document feeder (ADFR) 2 sided print unit Finisher Mail-bin finisher Job tray unit Shift tray unit G3 Multi-port TX marker Copy table Copy desk Plug-in counter (option) (standard) Di250f Di350f

: unavailable Remarks

16MB, 32MB (64 MB max.) Up to 5 drawers (including the main product) in total. Note: 4 drawers (including the main product) with Large Capacity Cabinet. Only one finishing option selectable (Finisher, Mailbin finisher, Job tray unit, or Shift tray unit) For Finisher/Mail-bin finisher, 5 drawers + Copy table or 3 drawers + Large Capacity Cabinet (or Copy desk) are required. TX marker is unavailable for 2 sided document feeder (ADFR).

1-4

1-2. LIST OF FUNCTIONS

(1/5) Function High speed scanning Speed High speed printout ECM mode High speed half tone High speed control Super fine mode Half tone transmission Auto retransmission after error Full automatic exposure control Manual exposure control Smoothing Mixed mode (Text + Photo) One-touch dialing ( : available : unavailable) (0.55 sec./Letter Crosswise fine) (Di350f : 35ppm/Letter Crosswise) (Di250f : 25ppm/Letter Crosswise) (2 sec. approx./Std. document)

Resolution

(ECM) (Copy/FAX) (Only for copy) (FAX function)

Operability

(300 destinations) # of abbreviated dialing number Abbreviated dialing (500 destinations) (30 destinations) One-touch program dialing # of one-touch dialing number Auto re-dialing Destination retrieval LCD display (320 x 240) Operation (Analog touch Panel) Select auto-mode screen (Copy/FAX automatic switch)

1-5

(2/5) Function 2-in-1 printout 2-to-1 page transmission TX marker Automatic document feed Automatic selection of print paper size FAX/Phone automatic switch Power Source Password communication saving & utility Multi polling functions Polling at regular times Non storage transmission Priority transmission Insert destination Message printing Automatic pause for PSTN number Display communication result Record TSI information Power Source saving mode Print lamp Sound volume Switch document reading length ADF 2 sided transmission Activity report (TX/RX) Transmission report Incompleted transmission report Serial broadcast report Relay report User account report User list User management list Abbr. dial# list One-touch dial# list Fax program list Memory clear report Bulletin Board list Relay group list Setting list ( : available : unavailable)

(option) (70 sheets, ADF)

(Ringer count method)

(ENERGY STAR R ) (setup on screen ; OFF/5 steps) (1m/4m) (Double scanning to compose 2-sided document) (with document margins, Result report) (with document margins, Result report) (with document margins, Result report) (with document margins)

Report functions

1-6

(3/5) Function Multi access Retransmission Document retransmission Reception by memory Transmission post Memory polling transmission confidential transmission confidential print Serial broadcast Relay broadcast Multi copy Remote multi copy Memory full control Quick memory transmission File backup Rotated Rx Selective polling Relay transmission Extra telephone System Management function per Configuration business section Chain dialing Hard disk Inch/mm conversion Memory Paper feed drawer PC print ( : available : unavailable)

(destination changeable)

(30 destinations)

Memory functions

(F code) (210 destinations) (F code) (sorting function) (F code) (Separate Tx)

(2H Standard, 72H Optional)

(PB forwarding receivable, PSTN - port 1 only) (100 sections, User management)

(64MB max., option) (3750 sheets max.) Option: 250x1, 500x2, 2500x1 (Option)

1-7

(4/5) Function EP-NET Self diagnostics Paper counter Misfeed counter Maintenance counter PM counter Trouble counter Counter per application In-file image data transmission Switch display of commuMaintenance nication error code Change standard zoom ratio Adjust touch panel registration. Adjust ADF zoom ratio (main/sub) Adjust ADF registration. (main/sub) Adjust BS zoom ratio (main/sub) Adjust BS registration. (main/sub) Check sensors Adjust Document size sensor Adjust stop position for size option document Adjust registration of printer engine (main/sub) Adjust mask of printer engine (main/sub) Adjust feeder loop of printer engine (main/sub) Test printing Adjust ATDC sensor Paper through test BS carriage free move CCD drive Lamp on (Memory dump/display, protocol trace, S/W switch list, service call setup ( : available : unavailable)

(Copy/FAX independently)

(Copy/FAX independently)

(ADF, BS, ADFR, engine, sorter)

(2-sided / 1-sided)

1-8

(5/5) Function Continuous copy Rotation function 2 sided copy 2-to-1 page copy 4-to-1 page copy Copy function Book document copy Single feed mode Mechanical sort Electrical sort Stapler Punch Memory recall ( : available : unavailable) Di250f: 1-99 sheets, Di350f: 1-999 sheets (Required Duplex unit option)

(ADFR manual feeder) Di250f: Finisher option, Di350f: Finisher or Shift tray unit option (Without mechanical sort) (Finisher option) (Finisher option)

1-9

Chapter 2

STRUCTURE

2-1. NAME OF UNITS

12 1 2

5 3

11

4 7,8

10

1. Duplexing Document Feeder (AFR-14) 2. Automatic Document Feeder *Di250f : AF-6 *Di350f : AF-7 3. Plug-In Counter 4. Printer Controller (Pi3500) 5. Duplex Unit (AD-10) *Di250f : option *Di350f : standard 6. Large Capacity Cabinet (PF-106) *2500-sheet cassette

7. Paper Feed Unit (PF-108) *500-sheet cassette 8. Paper Feed Unit (PF-110) *250-sheet universal cassette 9. Shift Tray (OT-100) *Di250f only 10. Job Tray (JS-200) 11. Mailbin Finisher (FN-500) 12. Finisher (FN-100)

2-1

2-2. External Appearance, Name of Parts

2

4 5

1 15 6 7 8 9 14 13 12 11 10 16

17 18

33 32 19 20 31

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 22 23

21

2-2

1. ADF Glass Assy. 2. Rear Holding Bracket 3. Original Glass 4. Front Holding Bracket 5. Control Panel 6. Front Upper Cover 7. Exit Lower Cover 8. Front Cover 9. LED Cover 10. MP Cassette 11. 500-Sheet Cassette 12. Upper Front Left Cover 13. Left Cover 14. Upper Cover 15. Left IR Cover 16. Original Cover 17. Rear Right IR Cover

18. Left Hinge Cover 19. Rear Left IR Cover 20. Rear Upper Cover 21. Rear Lower Cover 22. Right Hinge Cover 23. Connector Cover 24. Rear Inside Cover 25. Toner Bottle Cover 26. Harness Cover 27. Right Lower Cover 28. 500-Sheet Cassette Side Cover 29. Manual Bypass Tray 30. Side Cover 31. Fusing Unit 32. Front Inside Cover 33. Right IR Cover

2-3

2-3. CONFIGURATION OF COPIER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

26 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

25 1. 2nd Mirror 2. 3rd Mirror 3. Exposure Lamp 4. 1st Mirror 5. Lens 6. CCD Unit 7. Paper Exit Roller 8. Fusing Roller Thermostat (TS1) 9. Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1) 10. Paper Exit Sensor (PC3) 11. Right Fusing Roller 12. Duplex Unit Transport Roller 1 13. Left Fusing Roller 14. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor (PI1)

24

23

15. Fusing Cooling Fan Motor (M3) 16. Duplex Unit Transport Roller 2 17. Image Transfer Roller 18. Synchronizing Roller 19. Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC2) 20. Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC8) 21. Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll 22. Vertical Transport Roller 23. Paper Separator Pad 24. Paper Take-Up Roll 25. Imaging Cartridge (I/C) 26. PH Unit

2-4

Chapter 3

OPERATION

OPE Unit CPU ROM LSI NROM R4K I/F DRAM MEMC FONT-ROM RTC Li NCUK
MPK Multi-port

MFB
Legend

Speaker Board EMU

Control Panel

INV SCU1 SCU2 LCDC VRAM DG Universal Port MDM ROM RAM PCI NCU I/F AFE NCUK External Telephone BBRAM

IPUS

OPE CPU

Integrated block diagram

Option

LCD

KEY Touch Panel Centronics connector

Scanner base section Scanner Position Sensor 1 Scanner Position Sensor 2 Original Size Detecting Sensor 2,3,4 Original Size Detecting Sensor 7 Original Size Detecting Sensor 10

Multi-Protocol LAN

Centro1 Centro2

CODEC3

3-1. CIRCUITRY OPERATION

3-1
CODEC2

CODEC1

Size Reset Switch Original Cover Detecting Sensor

Copier Unit

HGB FCUE
Optical cable DRAM CCD Distance measurement sensor Distance measurement sensor

INV

Cold cathode tube Motor

PPC

ESP2
ACR

Copier engine

Power unit Ni-Cd battery

ADF door open/close sensor Original Size Detecting Sensor Document Empty sensor Registration Sensor Motor Paper Take-Up Clutch Print lamp TX marker

Paper cassette

ROT8 16 TMEM

Extended Memory

No paper LED

3-1-1. FUNCTION OF PKG

Summary of PKG functions Name of PKG-ASSY MFB Description A main control circuit with an external 32 bit RISC processor. It controls several units (circuitry of each unit, transmitter, reader, printer, mechanically moving parts, and operation) according to system software. This PKG has circuitry for scanning controller, CCD driver, CCD output image processor, binary image processor, optical transmission I/F, motor controller, and sensor I/F. This is a scanning image sensor and screwed to the lens housing. It receives control signals from an ESP2-LSI of the HGB board to scan documents and outputs analog image signals to the HGB board. An operation/display unit with the following parts: AOP board that has several switches, an analog touch panel control circuit, and a control CPU LCD unit that has LCD with a backlight and the analog touch panel Inverter for the backlight, a speaker and fixture plates, and a panel case A relay between the HGB board and several sensors for ADF A relay between the HGB board and several sensors for the mechanically moving parts of the Book scanner. It has a motor driver. A work memory. Its memory capacity is 12MB It stores image information. Its memory capacity is 8 or 16MB. It stores image information. Its memory capacity is 32MB. This is a line control unit that detects line signals including the line connection and the ringer. Connect this PKG to MFB for G3 Multi-port configuration.

HGB

CCD

INV for Scanning A DC-AC inverter to control the cold cathode tube (1) for scanning.

OPE unit

ACR BCR EMU ROT TMEM NCUK MPK

<< 1 >> MFB Board The MFB board is a main controller with an external 32 (internal 64) bit RISC processor. It controls several units of the system (e.g., circuitry of each unit, transmitter, reader, copier, mechanically moving parts, and operation) according to system software. The MFB board has 3 main blocks: [1] Main controller [2] Image Processor/FAX communicator [3] Centronics/expansion interface

[1] Main Controller (1) Overview The main controller has a CPU and an IPUS LSI for controlling several blocks, program memory (ROM), and work memory (DRAM). It also has backup memory (SRAM) to store status information of the system. The main controller uses this information for various controls.

3-2

(2) Block diagram

CPU Address bus AD bus ROM data bus IPUS LSI

Address bus Data bus ROM DRAM Clock Various I/Os

SRAM

Control panel Back up battery

LCD

(3) Function 1) CPU This is the CPU of the system. It uses an external 32 (internal 64) bit RISC processor. 2) IPUS LSI It connects the CPU and the controller for controlling overall operation of the system. 3) Program memory (ROM) The software program for operating the system is stored here. It has a memory capacity of 12MB (4MB x 3). 4) Work memory (DRAM) This memory serves the area of the system operation. Standard memory capacity is 4MB on the MFB board. 5) Backup memory (SRAM) It is a 512KB memory that stores the status information of the system. (4) Backup function 1) Method Backup location Battery backup RAM Clock LSI Method Lithium battery (discharge type) Lifetime 5 years approx Note Voltage/current 3V/1000mAh

Note: Daily usage 12 hours. It will last at least 10 years even if the system is always ON.
2) Backup contents Back up location Battery Backup RAM Clock LSI Contents Phone number........ Abbreviated phone numbers Self-data................TSI information and serial number are backed up Soft switch..............Registration data of soft switches Communication management....Information on activity reports

Time count

3-3

[2] Image Data Processor/FAX Communicator (1) Overview This processor has interface blocks with the scanner unit or the printer units, and the FAX communication block. It has the scanned image reception circuit (the optical reception circuit), a storage coder/decoder and a storage code memory manager (FCUE,LSI), image memory (DRAM FILE), a printer controller (FCUE LSI), a modem (V.34), and a communi cation controller (built in FCUE LSI). Each block is controlled by the CPU of the MFB board. The image memory has an external Ni-Cd battery for backup. (2) Block diagram
FCUE LSI Optical reception circuit

Scanner Optical cable

Storage coder Image memory

Control signal Printer Video signal

Print image size Storage converter decoder

File management

Backup circuit

Storage decoder Storage coder Communication image size converter

IPUS LSI

Communication coding/decoding Modulator V.34 Modem

Control signal

FAX

3-4

(3) Function 1) Scanned image receiver (optical receiver) An acquired image by the scanner is converted into an optical signal and then transmitted through the optical cable. The transmitted image is received by the optical receiver of the MFB board. The image data is transmitted with a high-speed transmission clock of 36.75 MHz. 2) Storage coder/decoder (FCUE LSI) The coder function codes image data into stored code data. The decoder function decodes stored code data into image data. 3) Image memory manager (FCUE LSI) This block reads/writes the stored code data through interface units (the scanner, the printer, and the communication units) from/into DRAM FILE by the unit of 1 block. The maximum data throughput for DRAM FILE is 320 Mbps. A time division method is used to refresh read/write of the data through the interface units, and DRAM FILE. 4) Image memory (DRAM FILE) Standard system has 16MB; 8MB on the MFB board and a ROT boards (8MB). The maximum capacity is 64MB by installing another ROT board and a TMEM board. Standard memory 16MB: MFB(8MB) + ROT(8MB) Add-on sort memory TMEM(32MB) and/or ROT (16MB)

Each memory board (ROT (8MB,16MB) and TMEM (32MB)) has its designated slot. Be careful when you insert it. 5) Printer controller (FCUE LSI) It processes the line density conversion for print image data (serial data) from the storage decoder, and stores it in the internal frame memory. The converted data is read synchronized with the PPC printer, added information on the left margin and the white mask, and then output to the printer as serial data. The frame memory can hold up to 20 Kbit of data to be output to the printer. The printer controller exchanges commands/statuses for controlling the printer unit. 6) Modem (V.34 modem) This modem has a digital signal processor (DSP), an analog front end (AFE) for A/D and D/A conversions, a modem F/WROM, and boot memory (SRAM). It follows the electrical communication standards of the recommended V.8, V.34, V.17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21ch2, T.3, and T.4. It also follows the T.30 binary signal procedure. The transmission speeds are 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400, and 300 bps. This modem has PB tone sending for PB calling. It is located on the memory map of the MFB board. 7) Communication controller (FCUE LSI and IPUS LSI) This controller performs necessary functions (relay control, ringer detection, line connection detection, polarity reverse detection, dialing and pulse sending) for G3 communication. It also detects the frequency of the tonal signal of G3 communication. 8) Image memory backup circuit This backup circuit switches the power source supply unit to the battery while the system is turned OFF or during power source failure so that the stored data in the image file memory (maximum 64MB) is being held.

3-5

[3] Centronics/expansion interface (1) Overview This interface block has a 36-pin bi-directional Centronics interface as a PC printer, a unidirectional Centronics interface and a PCI bus for LAN boards for future expansion, and an expansion interface for various system options. (2) Block diagram
To PC PC Printer Controller (Future expansion) IEEE1284 Interface 36-pin Centronics universal connector (36pins)

LAN board (Future expansion)

Uni-directional Centronics connector (40pins)

PCI bus connector (100pins)

IPUS LSI

Work memory connector (72pins) FCUE LSI

add-on Work memory (EMU)

Special connector (100pins)

Special connector (168pins)

Special connector (168pins)

Special connector (168pins)

Multiport unit

Add-on file memory (ROT08)

Add-on file memory (ROT16)

Add-on file memory (TMEM)

(MPK)

(3) Function 1) Special connectors (option for communication) Use them to attach the optional boards for the 2nd G3 Port. MPK board (G3 Multi-port) 2) Special connector Use them to add file memories. There are 3 boards that can be connected. ROT (8MB) ROT (16MB) TMEM (32MB) 3) 36-pin Centronics interface (universal connector) The system has the IEEE1284 interface (the Centronics interface) as a standard interface to be used as a PC printer for future expansion. 4) PCI bus (special connector) This connector is not used for general card edge types of interface but only for our preparatory board. Therefore, a commercial PCI board cannot be connected. It is reserved for a future expansion of network function.

3-6

<<2>>HGB Board [1] Overview This board controls the scanning operation. The core device is an ESP2 LSI and has a CCD driver, a CCD output image processor, a binary image processor, an optical transmission I/F, a motor controller, and a sensor I/F circuit. [2] Block diagram
ESP2 LSI

To CCD Board

CCD driving clock

CCD driver

Image signal from CCD board

Analog processor

A/D coverter

Binary image processor

Optical I/F circuit

To MFB board Optical cable

To BCR board for Book scanner

Motor controller

To ACR board Sensors for ADF

To BCR board for Book scanner

Sensor I/F circuit

To ACR board Sensors for ADF

To ADFR unit

ADFR I/F circuit

DPU I/F circuit

Address bus To MFB board Data bus

3-7

[3] Function of each block (1) CCD driver This driver is built in the ESP2 LSI and generates a clock for CCD driving. (2) CCD output image processor 1) Analog processor Two image signals from the CCD board are sampled and held by the analog processor. Then it restores the black level, adjusts the gain, mixes the 2 signals (i.e., adjusts the levels of the 2 CCD image signals to convert into 1 image signal), and then outputs the mixed signal to the A/D converter. 2)A/D converter The A/D converter receives the analog signal from Analog processor, converts it into a digitized parallel signal (8 bit for each pixel), and then outputs the digitized signal to the ESP2 LSI. (3) Binary image processor This processor is also built in the ESP2 LSI. It normalizes an 8 bit image signal from the A/D converter (shading correction), and processes it for high image quality (gamma correction and image region separation). It also performs MTF correction (ABC and moving average), and binary process (floating slice, dithering, and error diffusion). The binary image processor also performs zooming and the white mask process. The processed image signal is converted into serial data to output to the optical transmission I/F. (4) Optical transmission I/F This block converts an electrical (serial) signal from the ESP2 LSI into an optical signal in order for transmitting to the MFB board. The optical image signal and a synchronized clock signal will be transmitted. (5) Motor controller This controller is built in the ESP2 LSI. It generates signals for control, magnetic field excitation patterns, and currents of the motors of the Book scanner and the ADF scanner. (6) Sensor I/F circuit This controller is also built in the ESP2 LSI. It receives information such as the document size, the position of the top of the document, and the status of the cover, from sensors of the Book scanner and the ADF scanner. The sensor I/F circuit has a filtering circuit for removing chattering of signals from sensors. (7) ADFR I/F This circuit is built in the ESP2 LSI. ADF I/F sends command to the ADFR unit and it receives the status information from the ADFR unit.

3-8

<<3>> CCD Board [1] Overview The CCD board is the scanning image sensor. It is screwed to the lens housing unit. The CCD controlling signal from the ESP2 LSI of the HGB board is sent to the CCD via the CCD driver of the CCD board. There are two signals, one for odd number pixels and the other for the even number pixels, as the analog image signal from the CCD is sent to the HGB board. [2] Block diagram
Gothic letters indicate pin numbers.

Document

CCD

CN1-7,9

CCD driver

CN2-1,3,5,6 CN2-1 CN2-6 CN2-5 CN2-3 CN2-2,4 : HCCLK (Transmission clock) : HCTG (Transfer gate clock) : HCCP (Clamp pulse) : HCRS (Reset pulse) : AG CN1-1,2,3 : +12V CN1-4,5,6,8 : AG CN1-7,9 : APIX (Analog image signal) 9-pin connector

[3] Function of each block (1) CCD driver Buffers 4 signals from ESP2 LSI (HGB board) and send them to CCD (2) CCD 7500 Pixels (can read an A3 document with 600 dpi) High speed scanning (18.375MHz x 2 channels, Pixel rate is 36.75M pixels/sec.)

3-9

<<4>> INV for Reading [1] Overview This is a DC-AC inverter for reading, and is used for controlling the cold cathode tube (1). DC-AC inverter Input Voltage Input current Load current Operating frequency Secondary open voltage [2] Block diagram DC24V 48 40 5%

Typ 1.3 A (ave.) 3 mA (rms) 10 kHz

2110 V (rms)

PSU Power Supply Unit (Low voltage unit)

PSU +24V INV for BCR +24V reading

HGB

Control signal

Secondary open voltage

Cold cathode tube (for both BOOK & ADF)

3-10

<<5>> OPE UNIT [1] Overview The OPE unit has the following parts: (1) OPE board (AOP) that has various switches, an analog touch panel control circuit, and a controlling CPU with A/D conversion function (2) LCD unit that has a LCD panel with backlight and an analog touch panel (3) Inverter for backlight (4) Speaker and fuser/fusing plates (5) Panel case [2] Block diagram
OPE Unit

MFB board IPU LCD I/F Display data conversion circuit Display data toggle circuit LCD unit Analog touch panel

Contrast volume Serial I/F CPU Control circuit Inverter for backlight ON/OFF circuit Scan Key matrix Return Backlight

LEDX5 Warm restart AOP board Speaker

[3] Major Specifications of OPE Unit (1) LCD unit LCD screen Analog touch panel Brightness control voltage Material Backlight 320 x 240 dots Effective operation region: 116.57 x 87.77 17.3 to 20.1 V (at ambient temperature of 25 C) Colored polyester film with anti-glare process Cold cathode tube , life time over 15,000 hours Cannot replace Xe lamp alone

3-11

(2) Inverter for backlight Input Voltage Input current Output voltage without load Lighting frequency Tube current DC24V 5%

Typ 130 mA (ave.) 1000 V (rms) 30 kHz 4.5 mA (rms)

[4] Adjustment switches (1) Slide switch for controlling LCD brightness Slide type switch : adjusts brightness of the LCD screen (2) Warm restart switch Non-lock type tactile switch : used for unconditional warm restart [5] Remarks (1) FPC for the touch panel is extremely delicate. Do not detach it from the connector unless absolutely necessary. (2) When removing the OPE board, make sure that the speaker terminals and the fuser/ fusing plates are not in contact. <<6>> ACR Board [1] Overview The ACR board relays between the HGB board and various sensors for mechanical moving parts of ADF. It has a motor driver. [2] Block diagram
HGB ACR Various mechanism sensors (document detection, size detection, ADF door open/close, and tip detection sensors) S-motor driver pulse TX marker Cold cathode lamp control Electromagnetic clutch Copier lamp

<<7>> BCR Board [1] Overview The BCR relays between the HGB board and various sensors for mechanical parts of the Book scanner. It has a motor driver. [2] Block diagram
HGB BCR Various mechanism sensors (size detection, door open/close, 15 sensors, carriage sensor HP, carriage sensor L) S-motor driver pulse Cold cathode tube control

3-12

<<8>> EMU Board [1] Overview (1) Used as work memory (for future expansion. Not mounted.) (2) Memory capacity : 12MB (3) Expansion method : Insert an EMU board of 12MB into the designated socket for SIMM module. [2] Block diagram
EMU

6 DRAMs mounted 2M Byte DRAM 2

IPUS G/A

<<9>> ROT Board [1] Overview (1) Used as memory for image information (2) Memory capacity : 8MB or 16MB (2 types) (3) Expansion method : Insert this board into a module socket of the MFB board. Insert the 16MB type into CN8 DIMM socket, and the 8MB type into CN9 DIMM socket of the MFB board, respectively. Note: When you add a memory board, make sure that nothing is stored in the image memory. [2] Block diagram
ROT 2M Byte DRAM

MFB FCUE G/A

3-13

<<10>> TMEM Board [1] Overview (1) Used as memory for image information (2) Memory capacity : 32MB (3) Expansion method : Insert this board into a module socket of the MFB board. Use CN7 DIMM socket of the MFB board. Note: When you add a memory board, make sure that nothing is stored in the image memory. [2] Block diagram
TMEM 8M Byte DRAM

MFB FCUE G/A

3-14

<<11>> NCUK Board [1] Overview The NCUK board has various functions such as line connection, ringer detection, off-hook detection, polarity detection, and dialing pulse transmission. [2] Block diagram
CML Dialing pulse transmission circuit

LINE ST1 TEL T1 TR1 Line signal

Photo coupler Photo coupler Photo coupler [NCUI]

Ringer input Hook-off 1 input Hook-off 2 input

[3] Function of each block LINE is a modular port for connecting a phone line. TEL is another modular port to connect an extra telephone set. CML is a relay that switches from phone to fax. It will be turned ON by pressing the communication switch, detecting a ringer, or a facsimile calling signal. TR1 of the dial pulse transmitter is then turned ON to establish a DC-connection with the transformer (T1) The NCUK board cannot be used in the back to back mode because a signal from LINE is DC-connected through ST1 of the dial pulse transmitter. The actual connection with the line is necessary for testing this board. The dialing pulse transmitter outputs dial pulses controlled by the MFB board. The ringer detector provides an automatic reception function. It isolates a receiver ringer signal with a photo-coupler, and outputs it to the MFB board. The ringer signal is counted by the counter of G/A. The polarity detector uses two photo-couplers to detect the DC polarity of the line. If either of the detected signals is "1", the other signal is "0." The off-hook detector shares a circuit with the polarity detector, and detects off-hook, i.e., direct current.

3-15

<<12>> MPK Board [1] Overview The facsimile system will have G3 multi-port configurations once the MPK board is connected with the MFB board. The MPK board has 2 blocks: (1) G3 expansion port : This port has the same H/W as the modem of the MFB board, and will be used to connect the line through NCU for expansion. (2) CODEC : This unit is used for coding/decoding function. [2] Block diagram <1>Block diagram for function (1).
MFB board IPUS LSI Control line DATA SRAM DATA Modem F/W Analog signal Modem DSP CLK/DATA OSC 24.576MHz
Modem AFE analog front end RX TX

LPF TX path AMP RX path

AMP

HYB

T-type circuit Tonal signal

Line signal

Buffer

AMP Dial pulse signal, ringer detection Hook detection, CML relay signal NCU (Expansion board)

PIO

<2> Block diagram for function (2).

MFB board CPU Communication between CPUs PIO Control line Address, data,selector V853 RAM ROM

SR AM

3-16

[3] Overview of function for each block <1> G3 expansion port Modem DSP = IC5 Modem analog front end = IC14 1 Mbit high-speed SRAM = IC13 4 Mbit ROM = IC12 These parts are assembled to work as a "G3 modem." The modem DSP has a host I/F and is controlled by the IPUS LSI of the MFB board. The modem DSP transmits/receives FAX signals to/from analog circuits (including NCU) through the modem analog front end. F/W of the modem DSP is stored in the 4 Mbit ROM. The analog circuits including the HYB circuit have a discrete configuration using OP amplifiers. This configuration has the same H/W as the basic port side (the MFB board side).

3-17

3-2. OPERATION OF MECHANICAL PARTS

3-2-1. BOOK SCANNER UNIT (IR SECTION)
Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on the CCD Sensor as the Scanner is moved by the Scanner Motor. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal. The electrical image signal is then output to the MFB Board. 7 8 9 10 11

5 4 3 2 1

12

13 20 15 19 18 1. BCR Board (BCR) 2. Original Size Detecting Sensor 5 (UN8) 3. Original Cover Detecting Sensor (PC14) 4. Original Size Detecting Sensor 4 (UN7) 5. Exposure Lamp (LA2) 6. Original Size Detecting Sensor 6 (UN9) 7. Scanner Motor (M5) 8. HGB Board (HGB) 9. Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 (UN4) 10. Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 (UN5) 11. Original Size Detecting Sensor 3 (UN6) 17 16 14

12. Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 (PC12) 13. Size Reset Switch (S5) 14. CCD Board (CCD) 15. Lens 16. Scanner 17. 1st Mirror 18. Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 (PC13) 19. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage 20. Inverter Board (INV)

3-18

<<1>> Image Processing Flow Image processing is made up of the following blocks.
1. Photoelectric Conversion (CCD Sensor)

2. HGB Board Transmitted over an optical cable. 3. MFB Board

4. PH (Laser Emission)

1. Photoelectric Conversion (CCD Sensor) Light reflected off the original is received through mirrors and lens by the CCD Sensor which, in turn, outputs the corresponding data to the HGB Board. 2. HGB Board After converting the data received from the CCD to an analog signal, the board converts it to 8-bit image data (A/D conversion). It further makes various corrections and outputs the resultant image data to the MFB Board over an optical cable. 3. MFB Board This board compresses the image data received from the HGB Board, stores it, and uncompresses it. The image memory has a standard capacity of 16MB and can be expanded up to 64MB (optional). 4. PH Emits a laser beam according to the image data provided by the MFB Board to expose the surface of the PC Drum.

3-19

<<2>> Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism <Scanner> During a scan, the Scanner projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the 1st Mirror of the scanner and then to the 2nd and 3rd Mirrors. The Scanner is driven by the Scanner Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive Cables. Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. The Scanner is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 is blocked. This position serves as the reference for the scan motion. Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 determines the home position of the Scanner when AF-7 is used. <2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage> The 2nd and 3rd Mirrors are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct the light reflected off the 1st Mirror through the lens to the CCD. The 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage is also moved by the Scanner Drive Cables and pulleys driven by the Scanner Motor. It travels at a speed half that of the Scanner, thereby keeping constant the optical path length between the Original Glass and lens. Scanner Motor (M5)

Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 (PC12)

Scanner 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 (PC13)

3-20

<<3>> Original Size Detection Timing The copier CPU affirms and resets the readings of the original size at the following timings. Takes size readings: When the Original Cover Detecting Sensor is deactivated. Affirms size readings: When the Start key is pressed with the Original Cover Detecting Sensor activated or the Size Reset Switch deactuated. Resets size readings: When the Size Reset Switch is deactuated. Magnet

Original Cover Detecting Sensor (PC14)

Size Reset Switch (S5)

3-21

<<4>> Original Size Detection When the copier is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the sensors mounted in the IR receive light reflected off the original to allow the copier to determine the original size. Original Size Detecting Sensor 6 (UN9) Original Size Detecting Sensor 4 (UN7) Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 (UN4) Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 (UN5) Original Size Detecting Sensor 3 (UN6)

Original Size Detecting Sensor 5 (UN8)

3-22

<Original Size Identification: Metric Areas> Original Size 11 17 A3L A4L A4C A5L B4L FLS Letter L Letter C Legal r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r UN4 S1 r r r r S2 r r r r r r r UN5 S3 r r S4 r r r UN6 S5 UN7 S6 r r r S7 r r UN8 S8 r r UN9 S9 r r r r r r r r r r

r: Detected by sensor; L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

NOTE UN4, UN6 and UN8 are options.

<Original Size Identification: Inch Areas> Original Size 11 17 A3L A4L A4C B4L 5-1/2 8-1/2L FLS B5C Letter L Letter C Legal r r r r r r r r r r r r r UN5 S2 r r r r r r r r r r r r S3 r r S4 r r r UN6 S5 UN7 S6 r r r S7 r r UN8 S8 r r UN9 S9 r r r r r r r r r r r

r: Detected by sensor; L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

NOTE UN6, UN8 and UN9 are options.

3-23

3-2-2. OPERATION OF COPIER

<<1>> Copying process
15. Paper Exit 3. Photoelectric Conversion Section 13. Erase 4. HGB Board 2. Drum Charging 10. Paper Separation 5. MFB Board 6. Laser Exposure 1. PC Drum 9. Image Transfer 7. Development 8. Paper Feed 8. Paper Feed 12. Cleaning 11. Duplex Unit 14. Fusing

1. PC Drum The drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with photosensitive material on which an electrostatic latent image is produced. 2. Drum Charging A scorotron charger employing a comb electrode generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the PC Drum. 3. Photoelectric Conversion Section The Exposure Lamp directs light onto the original. The light reflected off the original is directed and resized by the mirrors and lens so as to produce a reduced-size image on the CCD Sensor. 4. HGB Board Converts an electric signal into a corresponding 8-bit digital image signal (A/D conversion), makes various corrections, and outputs the results to the MFB Board. 5. MFB Board Compresses the image data received from the HGB Board, stores it, and uncompresses it. 6. Laser Exposure The laser beam emitted from the LD (laser diode) strikes the surface of the PC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image. 7. Development Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the PC Drum surface, creating a visible image. 8. Paper Feed Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source. 9. Image Transfer An Image Transfer Roller is used. A positive charge applied to the roller causes the visible image on the surface of the PC Drum to transfer onto the front side of the paper.

3-24

10. Paper Separation The PC Drum Separator Fingers remove paper from the surface of the PC Drum. 11. Duplex Unit Makes 2-sided copies. 12. Cleaning The Cleaning Blade scrapes residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum and the toner is recycled back to the Developing Unit. 13. Erase The PC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively removes any residual charge from the drum surface. 14. Fusing Heat and pressure applied by the Right and Left Fusing Rollers fuse toner on the paper. 15. Paper Exit Feeds paper out of the copier.

3-25

<<2>> Drive system A

1171M024AB

A: Scanner Motor (M5) Drives the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. B: I/C Motor (M1) Drives the I/C Unit. C: Main Motor (M2) Drives the Paper Take-Up Roll, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll, Synchronizing Roller, Image Transfer Roller, and Fusing Unit.

3-26

<<3>> Operating sequence A The power cord is plugged into the power outlet.

B The Power Switch is turned ON.

ON ON DC voltage output Control panel display ON Approx. 560 msec. Fusing Roller Heater Lamp

The warming-up cycle is completed.

Main Motor Approx. 20 sec. OFF Predrive stops Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at half speed.

ON

ON

Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at full speed. Developing bias (DC) ON Approx. 100 msec. ON ON I/C Motor I/C Cooling Fan Motor

Image transfer output: - voltage ON Approx. 700 msec. Image transfer output: + voltage ON Approx. 400 msec.

ON Approx. 400 msec.

Image transfer output: - voltage

Image transfer output: + voltage

ON Approx. 400 msec.

Image transfer output: - voltage

T/C ratio is checked for abnormality for approx. 28 sec.

Normal T/C Abnormal T/C: approx. 31 sec. OFF OFF I/C Motor I/C Cooling Fan Motor Image transfer output Approx. 15 min. OFF Developing bias (DC)

OFF Approx. 400 msec.

3-27

The Start key is pressed.

Polygon Motor Fusing Cooling Fan Motor ON Approx. 6 sec. Laser ON Developing bias (DC) ON Approx. 100 msec. Image transfer output: - voltage

ON ON

Approx. 1.1 sec.

ON

Image transfer current value for non-printing timing between sheets of paper

ON ON Approx. 140 msec. ON

I/C Motor I/C Cooling Fan Motor Main Motor The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at full speed. The Ozone Fan Motor turns at full speed.

ON Approx. 700 msec.

Paper Take-Up Solenoid

The Synchronizing Roller Sensor is activated.

OFF Approx. 110 msec. Paper Take-Up Solenoid

ON VSYNC signal ON: approx. 50 msec. later ON ON

Paper Take-Up Solenoid Synchronizing Clutch Developing bias (AC) Approx. 160 msec. ON

Approx. OFF 90 msec.

Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Image transfer current value for printing

The Synchronizing Roller Sensor is deactivated.

OFF Approx. 130 msec. OFF Approx. 170 msec. ON Approx. 320 msec. Synchronizing Clutch Developing bias (AC) Image transfer output: - voltage

OFF Approx. I/C Motor 650 msec. OFF I/C Cooling Fan Motor Approx. 15 min. Laser OFF Developing bias (DC)

OFF

3-28

The Paper Exit Sensor is deactivated.

OFF Approx. 680 msec. OFF Main Motor The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at half speed. Polygon Motor Approx. 10 sec. Approx. 20 sec. OFF OFF Ozone Fan Motor Fusing Cooling Fan Motor

3-29

<<4>> Image stabilization system The following image stabilization controls are provided to ensure stabilized copy image. Item PC Drum temperature correction Purpose Control

To compensate for any change The I/C Thermistor is used to in ID due to changing PC Drum detect temperature and, temperatures. according to the detected temperature, Vg/Vb is corrected. To compensate for degraded Corrects Vg according to the sensitivity caused by a deterio- period of time during which the rating PC Drum. PC Drum has turned.

PC Drum deterioration correction

PC Drum Charge Corona

I/C Thermistor (TH2)

PC Drum
Grid Voltage: (Vg) PC Drum Revolution Counter

Sleeve/ Magnet Roller

Developing Bias: (Vb)

CPU
1171M028AA

3-30

3-2-3. IMAGING CARTRIDGE (I/C)

This copier employs an Imaging Cartridge (I/C in this manual) that contains a PC Drum, PC Drum Charge Corona, Developing Unit, and Cleaning Unit as one unit.

Toner Supply Port

1171M003AA

ATDC Sensor (E1)

3-31

<<1>> I/C Drive Mechanism Drive from the I/C Motor is transmitted via a gear train to the PC Drum and Hopper.

PC Drum Drive Gear

I/C Motor (M1)

Hopper Drive Gear

1171M004AA

Electrical Component M1

Control Signal PJ16A-3

ON L

OFF H

<<2>> Identification and Life of I/C When the Start key is pressed or the Side Cover is opened and closed, the copier determines whether the I/C is new or one which has been used previously. The copier monitors the I/C life by storing in memory the period of time during which the PC Drum has turned. The data is cleared when a new I/C is installed in the copier.

3-32

3-2-4. PC DRUM
The PC Drum used in this copier is the organic photoconductor (OPC) type. The drum consists of an aluminum base coated with a charge generation layer and a charge transport layer. Handling Precautions Prolonged exposure to light can cause the photoconductor surface of the drum to suffer light fatigue, resulting in a loss of photosensitivity. If the I/C is removed from the copier, it should be wrapped in a soft, clean, opaque cloth or other protective covering to prevent exposure to light.

PC Drum

PC Drum Cross-Section Charge Transport Layer Charge Generation Layer Aluminum Base

Gear Grounding of the PC Drum The PC Drum ground point is located inside and at the front end of the I/C as viewed from the front of the copier and in constant contact with the Drum Holding Shaft. When the I/C is installed in the copier, the Drum Holding Shaft contacts the ground point. This provides for assured grounding of the PC Drum through the ground plate in the rear to the frame of the copier. Ground Point PC Drum

Ground Plate

Shaft

3-33

3-2-5. DRUM CHARGING

A scorotron charger system generates a negative DC corona discharge onto the PC Drum surface. The grid mesh ensures uniform charging. The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the grid mesh is controlled by the constant voltage circuitry within the High Voltage Unit. It is varied through image stabilization control. To restrict ozone production, the copier uses a PC Drum Charge Corona with a comb electrode. PC Drum Charge Corona PC Drum

1171M006AB

1171M008AC

Comb Electrode Grid Mesh Electrical Component Drum charging output Control Signal PJ14A-3A ON L OFF H

3-34

3-2-6. ERASE LAMP

Any potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum is neutralized by both light from the Erase Lamp and a DC negative voltage applied by the Charge Neutralizing Sheet. The Charge Neutralizing Sheet applies a negative charge on the surface of the PC Drum which is positively charged by the Image Transfer Roller. A voltage of -820V is applied to the Charge Neutralizing Sheet from the High Voltage Unit. The Erase Lamp then illuminates the surface of the PC Drum to further neutralize it. The Erase Lamp consists of ten tungsten lamps.

Erase Lamp (LA1)

I/C PC Drum

Cleaning Blade Charge Neutralizing Sheet PC Drum Erase Lamp (LA1)

PC Drum Charge Corona

Sleeve/Magnet Roller Electrical Component LA1 Control Signal PJ11A-6A All lamps ON H Standby ON L

3-35

3-2-7. PH SECTION
Based on the image data output from the MFB Board, the LD (laser diode) is activated and the corresponding light strikes the surface of the PC Drum.

Polygon Motor Drive Board (UN3) Di350f Only PH Unit

3-36

<<1>> PH Components 4 3 2 5 6

8 1. Polygon Motor Drive Board (UN3) Di250f Only 2. Cylindrical Lens 3. SOS Mirror 4. Collimator Lens Electrical Component M10 5. 6. 7. 8.

7 Laser Diode Board (PWB-B) SOS Sensor f- Lens Polygon Motor (M10)

Control Signal PJ8A-3

ON L

OFF H

3-37

<<2>> Laser Emission Timing (SOS Signal) The signal output from the Master Board triggers the firing of the laser. The laser beam travels to the Polygon Mirror, lens, and SOS Mirror to eventually hit the SOS Sensor, which generates an SOS signal. The SOS signal determines the laser emission timing for each line in the main scanning direction. Cylindrical Lens Polygon Motor (M10) Collimator Lens Laser Diode Board SOS Mirror (PWB-B) SOS Sensor

Polygon Mirror

f- Lens PC Drum V Illust for Di350f

PC Drum

SOS Mirror

SOS Sensor

SOS Signal D C B A

A to B: LD activation B to C: LD OFF C to D: Laser beam exposure area according to the image data

3-38

3-2-8. DEVELOPING UNIT

The Toner Conveying Rollers mix the toner and carrier particles together and carry the toner/carrier mixture up to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller. The magnetic brush formed on the surface of the roller allows the toner to come into contact with the charges on the surface of the PC Drum, thus forming an electrostatic latent image. 1 2 3 4 5 6

14

13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

12

11

10 8. PC Drum 9. Sleeve/Magnet Roller 10. 1st Toner Conveying Roller 11. ATDC Sensor (E1) 12. 2nd Toner Conveying Roller 13. 3rd Toner Conveying Roller 14. Spent Toner Recycling Duct

Spent Toner Recycling Coil PC Drum Charge Corona Spent Toner Feed Roller 2 Cleaning Blade Spent Toner Feed Roller 1 PC Drum Paper Separator Finger PC Drum Protective Shutter

3-39

<<1>> Sleeve/Magnet Roller This copier employs the MT-HG system with a Sleeve/Magnet Roller having the following magnetic characteristics. Turning of the sleeve surrounding the Magnet Roller ensures that fresh developer from the Developer Mixing Chamber is always being conveyed to the point of development with respect to the PC Drum. N1 : The point of development with the maximum magnetic flux density which ensures that the carrier is firmly held onto the Sleeve Roller when toner is attracted to the latent image. : The magnetic flux density between these two poles is made low to ensure that the developer remaining on the surface of the Sleeve Roller is smoothly recycled. They also prevent developer from scattering. : The developer brush is formed by this pole and its height is moderated before the brush is regulated by the Doctor Blade. : This pole ensures that the developer is conveyed to the point of development over the wide interval between N3 and N1. : If developer is compacted and clogs at the Doctor Blade and, as a result, part of the surface of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered with developer, the nearby developer around this pole with a weak magnetic force goes to those uncovered areas. This helps prevent white lines from occurring on the copy. N1 PC Drum

S1, N2

N3 S2a S2b

S2b S2a

S1

Sleeve/ Magnet Roller N3 N2 1st Toner Conveying Roller

3-40

<<2>> Developing Bias The amount of toner attracted onto the surface of the PC Drum is controlled by varying the developing bias voltage. As the PC Drum deteriorates and its photoconductive layer begins to wear, it becomes more sensitive to the increase in the amount of toner. As a countermeasure against this problem, the developing bias voltage is automatically switched according to the PC Drum temperature, thereby stabilizing the image quality level.

PC Drum

Sleeve/Magnet Roller

Developing Bias Contact Terminal Electrical Component Vb Control Signal PJ14A-1A ON L OFF H

3-41

<<3>>ATDC Sensor The ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment is made when a new I/C is installed in the copier. Toner replenishing control is thereafter controlled as detailed in the following. [1] ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment The ATDC Sensor is automatically adjusted when a new I/C is loaded in the copier. During this sequence, the copier reads the sensor output value and sets it as the reference. This reference value is stored in memory and used until the I/C reaches its service life. [2] Toner Replenishing Control While the I/C Motor is turning, the ATDC Sensor samples T/C and, according to the readings, the copier provides the following controls. T/C Ratio (%) More than 19 14 to 19 13 to 14 12 to 13 10 to 12 7 to 10 Less than 7 Sampling Data (V) Less than 1.41 2.32 to 1.41 2.50 to 2.32 2.68 to 2.50 3.10 to 2.68 3.92 to 3.10 More than 3.92 Control Details Defective ATDC Sensor Toner replenished for 0 msec. Toner replenished for 54 msec. at intervals of approx. 1 sec. Toner replenished for 150 msec. at intervals of approx. 1 sec. Toner replenished for 378 msec. at intervals of approx. 500 msec. Passed onto the T/C recovery mode. Defective ATDC Sensor

V Toner replenishment represents the operation of the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor. [3] Toner Empty Control (T/C Recovery Mode) When the control is passed onto the T/C recovery mode, the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor is energized to replenish the supply of toner into the Developing Unit and, if T/C is recovered to a level of 14% or higher (2.32V or less) within 150 sec., it resets the toner-empty condition.

3-42

<<4>> Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism Toner is replenished from the Sub Hopper to the Developing Unit by turning the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor for the period of time controlled by the ATDC output voltage (T/C).

Sub Hopper

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor (M7) Electrical Component M7 Control Signal PJ11A-8A ON DC24V OFF L

3-43

<<5>> Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism A toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper is detected by the Magnet Lever that moves up and down as the Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever turns and actuates and deactuates the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch. While the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is more than the predetermined amount, the Magnet Lever rests on the toner, keeping the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch deactuated even when the Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever turns. As toner is consumed, the Magnet Lever lowers to eventually actuate the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch, at which timing the copier detects a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper.

Magnet Lever

Magnet

Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch (S4)

Electrical Component S4

Control Signal PJ11A-7B

ON L

OFF H

3-44

<<6>> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism When a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper is detected, the Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor is energized to turn the Toner Bottle, thereby supplying toner from the Main Hopper to the Sub Hopper. The Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor mounted on the coupling ensures that the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is positioned at the top whenever the bottle is stopped. The Toner Bottle Cover Sensor detects whether the Toner Bottle Cover is open. If the cover is open, the copier does not authorize the initiation of a new copy cycle. If the cover is opened during a copy cycle, the copier interrupts the cycle. Toner Bottle

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor (M6)

Sub Hopper Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor (PC10)

Electrical Component M6 Electrical Component PC10

Control Signal PJ11A-4A Control Signal PJ11A-2B

ON DC24V Unblocked L

OFF L Blocked H

3-45

<<7>> I/C Cooling Fan Motor The I/C Cooling Fan Motor prevents the temperature inside the copier (around the entire I/C) from rising inordinately.

I/C

I/C Cooling Fan Motor (M9) Electrical Component M9 Control Signal PJ18A-10 ON DC24V OFF L

<<8>> Ozone Fan Motor Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona is absorbed by the Ozone Filter from the air being drawn out of the copier by the Ozone Fan Motor. Ozone Fan Motor (M8)

I/C

Ozone Filter

Electrical Component M8

Control Signal PJ11A-1A

ON DC24V

OFF L

3-46

3-2-9. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION

NOTE For the details of the 2nd Cassette (500-Sheet Cassette), see the relevant option service manual.
This copier employs the Multi-Purpose (MP) Cassette whose capacity is about 250 sheets (about 20 sheets for special paper). Paper Size Detecting Board (PWB-I)

Paper Take-Up Roll

Trailing Edge Stop <<1>> MP Cassette Paper Lifting Plate The Paper Lifting Plate installed in the MP Cassette is spring-loaded to push the paper stack upward. When the cassette is slid into the copier, the lever located on the bottom of the cassette and used to lock down the Paper Lifting Plate is pushed and unlocked, allowing the Paper Lifting Plate to push the paper stack upward.

Lever Paper Lifting Plate

3-47

<<2>> MP Cassette-in-Position Detection When the MP Cassette is slid into the copier, the light blocking plate located in the rear of the cassette blocks the Cassette Set Sensor and the copier determines that the MP Cassette has been slid into position.

Cassette Set Sensor (PC6) Light Blocking Plate

1167M052AB

Electrical Component PC6

Control Signal PJ13A-5B

Unblocked H

Blocked L

3-48

<<3>> MP Cassette Paper Empty Detection Two sensors are used in this copier: the Paper Empty Sensor detects a paper-empty condition, while the Paper Near-Empty Sensor detects a paper near-empty condition. Paper Near-Empty Detection: A paper near-empty condition is detected as the paper is consumed and the Near-Empty Lever lowers to eventually block the sensor (L). At this time, the MP Cassette Paper Empty LED starts blinking. A paper-empty condition results when about 50 more sheets of paper are used after the near-empty condition has been detected. Near-Empty Lever

Paper Lifting Lever Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC4) Paper Empty Detection: A paper-empty condition is detected as the paper is consumed and the Empty Lever lowers to eventually block the sensor (L). At this time, the MP Cassette Paper Empty LED lights up steadily. Paper Empty Sensor (PC5)

Empty Lever Electrical Component PC4 PC5 Control Signal PJ14A-13A PJ13A-2B Unblocked H H Blocked L L

3-49

<<4>> MP Cassette Paper Size Detection The Paper Size Detecting Board detects the length of the paper (FD). A lever is connected to the Trailing Edge Stop of the cassette and, as the stop is slid to the size of the paper loaded in the cassette, the lever is moved to turn ON and OFF the size detecting switches mounted on the copier side. The control panel settings are necessary for any paper size other than the following. Paper Size Detecting Switches (PWB-I) 1 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 3 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF Paper Size A3L, 1117L B4L, 8-1/214L A4L B5L, 8-1/211L A4C/A5L B5C A5C 8-1/211C

Paper Size Detecting Board (PWB-I) 1 2 3 4

Trailing Edge Stop Electrical Component PWB-I (1) PWB-I (2) PWB-I (3) PWB-I (4) Control Signal PJ14A-1B PJ14A-2B PJ14A-3B PJ14A-4B ON L L L L OFF H H H H

3-50

<<5>> Paper Take-Up Mechanism Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted to the Paper Take-Up Clutch (spring clutch) and, by energizing the Paper Take-Up Solenoid, the Paper Take-Up Roll is turned. The paper separating mechanism employs a Paper Separator Pad. Main Motor (M2)

Paper Take-Up Clutch

Paper Take-Up Roll Paper Separator Pad

Paper Take-Up Solenoid (SL1)

<<6>> Manual Bypass Tray [1] Construction of the Manual Bypass Tray Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted to the Manual Paper Feed Take-Up Clutch and, by energizing this clutch, the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll is turned. Main Motor (M2) Manual Paper Feed Take-Up Clutch (CL3) Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC8)

Manual Bypass Tray

Electrical Component M2 SL1 CL3

Control Signal PJ16A-1 PJ13A-13B PJ4A-9A

ON L L L

OFF H H H

3-51

[2] Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Detection The Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor detects a sheet of paper that is fed via the Manual Bypass Tray. The size and type of the paper for manual feed are set on the control panel. <Paper Present: Unblocked (H)> Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC8)

<Paper Not Present: Blocked (L)>

Electrical Component PC8

Control Signal PJ4A-7B

Unblocked H

Blocked L

<<7>> Paper Take-Up Retry Mechanism To minimize the occurrence of a paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-Up Roll, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if a sheet of paper fails to reach the Synchronizing Roller Sensor within a given period of time after the solenoid has been energized first. A paper take-up misfeed results if the sheet of paper does not reach the Synchronizing Roller Sensor even after two paper take-up sequences.

3-52

3-2-10. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS

The Synchronizing Rollers of this copier are located inside the Right Door. They are easily accessible for misfeed clearing by just opening the Right Door.

Synchronizing Roller

<<1>> Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism/Control The Synchronizing Rollers are turned by the drive from the Main Motor transmitted to the Synchronizing Clutch. The rollers are started when the Synchronizing Clutch is deenergized. Main Motor (M2) Synchronizing Clutch (CL1)

Left Synchronizing Roller

Right Synchronizing Roller

Electrical Component M2 CL1

Control Signal PJ16A-1 PJ13A-2A

ON L L

OFF H H

3-53

<<2>> Paper Dust Remove The Paper Dust Remover is installed so that it makes contact with the Left Synchronizing Roller. It is intended for preventing paper dust from sticking to the surface of the PC Drum. As the roller turns in contact with the Paper Dust Remover, triboelectric charging occurs, which attracts paper dust from the paper that passes between the two rollers and the dust is, in turn, transferred onto the Paper Dust Remover.

Synchronizing Roller

Paper Dust Remover

Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC2)

3-54

3-2-11. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Image Transfer This copier employs an Image Transfer Roller to transfer the image to the paper. The High Voltage Unit applies an image transfer current to this roller. To ensure that image transfer efficiency is stabilized, the image transfer current is automatically varied according to the paper size, paper type, and the B/W ratio of the original. To prevent toner from sticking to the Image Transfer Roller, an image transfer voltage of -975V is applied to the roller for cleaning. Paper Separation To neutralize any charge left on the paper, to which the image has been transferred, the High Voltage Unit applies a voltage of -1200V via a ground plate to the Charge Neutralizing Plate.

PC Drum

Ground Plate Charge Neutralizing Plate

Image Transfer Roller

Electrical Component Image transfer output

Control Signal PJ14A-2A

ON L

OFF H

3-55

3-2-12. PC DRUM PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS

The three PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the I/C mechanically separate paper from the surface of the PC Drum to ensure good and positive paper separation. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers

PC Drum

PC Drum Protective Shutter Paper Path Center

8.5cm

8.5cm

3-56

3-2-13. PC DRUM CLEANING

This copier employs a spent toner recycling mechanism. The Cleaning Blade which is held pressed against the surface of the PC Drum scrapes residual toner off the surface. The waste toner is conveyed by Spent Toner Feed Roller 1 and 2 to the Spent Toner Recycling Duct and eventually back to the Developer Mixing Chamber.

Cleaning Blade PC Drum

Spent Toner Feed Roller 1 Spent Toner Feed Roller 2

Toner Conveying Rollers

Spent Toner Recycling Coil

Recycling Duct

3-57

3-2-14. FUSING UNIT

The paper, to which the developed image is yet to be fixed, is fed through heated Left and Right Fusing Rollers. The heat and pressure applied at this time fixes the image permanently to the paper. 1 2

9 4 8

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Paper Exit Roller Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever Paper Exit Sensor (PC3) Pressure Spring Right Fusing Roller

6. 7. 8. 9.

Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1) Left Fusing Roller Fusing Roller Thermostat (TS1) Fusing Paper Separator Finger

3-58

<<1>> Drive Mechanism Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted via a gear train to the Right Fusing Roller.

Right Fusing Roller

Paper Exit Roller

Main Motor (M2)

Electrical Component M2

Control Signal PJ16A-1

ON L

OFF H

<<2>> Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism To ensure that there is a certain width of area of contact between the Left and Right Fusing Rollers, pressure springs are installed. The rollers are held pressed against each other at all times and they are released only when servicing the copier or replacing parts. The pressure between the two rollers is approx. Di350f: 17 kg, Di250f: 12kg The rollers can be released by moving the Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever in the direction of the arrow. Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever Pressure Spring

3-59

<<3>> Fusing Temperature Control The Fusing Roller Heater Lamp inside the Left Fusing Roller provides the following temperature control. - Temperature Control During Standby State -

200 185

Approx. 5 min.

Approx. 1 min.

Warm-Up Completed (200C)

Mode 1

Mode 2 Mode 3

- Temperature Control During a Copy Cycle -

210 200 190 180 175 Approx. 5 min. Approx. 1 min. Special paper Plain paper (1-sided) Plain paper (2-sided) Transparencies

Mode 1

Mode 2 Mode 3

<Temperature Control> The Fusing Roller Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Left Fusing Roller. It provides an analog voltage input to the Master Board allowing the copier to control the fusing temperature. Electrical Component H1 Electrical Component TH1 Control Signal PJ16A-8 Control Signal PJ16A-5 ON L OFF H

Low Temp. High Temp. Analog input

3-60

<Temperature Control by Mode> The mode that is initiated following the completion of a warm-up cycle varies as detailed below depending on the machine condition and the Fusing Roller temperature at the restart of temperature control. Machine Condition Power is turned ON. Temperature control is interrupted during warm-up. Temperature control is interrupted during mode 1. Temperature control is interrupted during mode 2. Temperature control is interrupted during mode 3. Mode 1 Fusing Roller Temperature Less than 100C 100C or higher Mode 2

Mode 1

Mode 2

<<4>> CPM Control As a measure to prevent the temperature on the edges of the Fusing Rollers (over which no part of paper passes) from rising in a multi-copy cycle using small size paper (width of 250 mm or less), the paper feed interval is made greater. <Control> If a sheet of small size paper is taken up and fed in during mode 1, control is switched to mode 2. The number of sheets of small size paper that are fed through is counted. <Timing> The counter reaches 30. The plain/special paper counter reaches N specified below: If the control is in mode 1 or mode 2 when the counter starts counting, N = 30. If the control is in mode 3 when the counter starts counting, N = 100. <Resetting> If a period of 2 min. or more elapses, during which the counter does not count up after the counter has started counting, the counter is cleared resetting the CPM control.

3-61

3-2-15. PAPER EXIT UNIT

The Paper Exit Roller feeds the paper, to which the developed image has been fixed, out of the copier. The Charge Neutralizing Brush touches the surface of the sheet of paper being fed out of the Fusing Unit to neutralize any static charge left on it. This effectively prevents two sheets of paper fed out of the copier from sticking to each other due to static charge.

Charge Neutralizing Brush

Paper Exit Roller

3-62

3-2-16. FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR

The Fusing Cooling Fan Motor located in the Right Door prevents the temperature of the Fusing Unit Cover and the area above the I/C from rising inordinately. The motor also draws the paper after it has been separated from the PC Drum onto the transport guide to ensure that it is stably and smoothly fed into the Fusing Unit.

Fusing Unit Fusing Cooling Fan Motor (M3)

I/C During Copy Cycle Full speed In Standby Half speed During Warm-Up Stop L

Electrical Component M3

Control Signal PJ13A-3A

Pulse output

3-63

3-2-17. POWER UNIT COOLING FAN MOTOR

The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor prevents the temperature at the Power Supply Unit and the Polygon Motor in the PH from rising inordinately.

Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor (M4)

Power Supply Unit 1 (PU1)

1171M034AA

Master Board (PWB-A)

Electrical Component M4

Control Signal PJ6A-2

While Main Motor is Turning Full speed DC24V

In Standby Half speed DC10V

3-64

3-3. SYSTEM CONTROL

3-3-1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL
Communication control of this system follows ITU-T (previously known as CCITT) recommended T.30 binary procedure (G3/ECM; error collection mode). Communication mode will be selected automatically with the type of phone line (PSTN) and the ID signal from a remote terminal. V3.4 Mode Communication Procedure
2 Call Terminal
CNC CM

4
70 5ms
Modem parameter sequence

75

5ms

70

5ms

70
System parameter sequence

5ms

CI

INF 0 oc

B L1 L2

S S PP TRN

P ph ALT M ph M ph E

Flags

TS1 DCS Flags

"1"

1 Answer Terminal
ANS mn

JM

INF A A 0 oa

A INF
0 oh

P ph ALT M ph M ph E NSF CS1 DIS

Flags

CFR Flags

75
Network Interaction

5ms
Line Probing Primary Channel Equalizer Training Modem Parameter Exchange T.30 Fax Handshaking

Primary Channel Resync.

Pre-control
7-1 Source Terminal
Image Data Sh Sh ALT E PPSMPS Flags "1"

S S PP B1

Image Data

Recipient Terminal

Sh Sh ALT

Flags

MCF Flags

Between pages
7-2 Source Terminal
Image Data Sh Sh ALT E PPSEOP Flags DCN "1"

Line Disconnect

Recipient Terminal

Sh Sh ALT

Flags

MCF

Flags

Line Disconnect

Post-control

3-65

V3.4 mode does not always select the transmission speed of 36.6Kbit/s. An optimal transmission speed will be selected according to the sequences described in the item 3 and 4 below in order to establish communication. Transmission speed : 36.6 to 2.4 Kbit/s (by 2.4K step) Symbol rate : 6 rates (5 rates are supported) 3429, 3200, 3000, 2800, (2743), 2400 symbol/s [1] CNG Calling tone A monotone signal of 1100 Hz, transmitted with the period of 0.5 sec ON and 3 sec OFF. [2] V.8 Modem ID sequence A 300 bit/sec. signal. This sequence exchanges information on function types and modulation methods with a remote terminal. The following sequences will be proceeded with the modulation method that both terminals have among the exchanged system information. [3] Line probing Sequence to measure line characteristics. This sequence measures the line characteristics by exchanging signals between two modems. The symbol rate will be determined by this sequence. This sequence will be one of basis for data to determine the transmission sequence. [4] TRN Equalizer training sequence This sequence corresponds to the conventional procedure TCF. Sending a signal with the fastest transmission speed specified by the remote terminal sets the equalizer of the modem of the receiver terminal. [5] Control channel Sequence to determine modem parameters and system parameters. A signal of 1200 bit/sec. It corresponds to the conventional procedure of phase B. (1) A sequence for determining modem parameters It determines the transmission speed of the primary channel by the results of the line probing sequence and TRN (equalizer training sequence). (2) Sequence to determine system parameters The same sequence as the conventional phase B procedure. [6] Primary channel Sequence for transmitting image data. It corresponds to the conventional phase C procedure. [7] Control channel It corresponds to the conventional phase D procedure. A signal of 1200 bit/s. (1) Sequences between pages when there are multiple pages. (2) Page termination sequence.

3-66

<<1>> Communication Mode [1] Priority This system has two communication modes: ECM and G3. Communication will be established with an appropriate mode determined by the capability of the remote terminal. The priority of the communication modes is as follows: Priority Communication mode ECM Remark Followed ITU-T (Previously CCITT) recommendation (Can communicate with other companys system). Error correction by procedure signals. Followed ITU-T (Previously CCITT) recommendation (Can communicate with other companys system)

1st

2nd

G3

Note: G4/UHS/G2/MF modes are unavailable to the system.

[2] Communication modes of ECM/G3 An optimal mode will be selected according to the capabilities of both terminals: RX V.34/ECM V.34/ECM TX (Sender) V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3 V.34/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3 V.17/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3 (Receiver) V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/ECM V.29/ECM V.29/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3

V.17:14000bps starting mode V.29: 9600bps starting mode <<2>> Encoding Method There are 4 encoding methods available to this system: JBIG, MMR, MR, MH. An optimal method will be selected according to the capabilities and image quality of both terminals. Encoding method JBIG MMR MR MH Binary priority 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Remark ECM ECM

Note: UMH/UMR are unavailable to the system.

3-67

3-3-2. SELECTING PAPER

<<1>> Printing Area The figure below shows the printable area on the paper.
4mm

4mm

4mm

4mm

The minimum margins are 4 mm*. * The minimum margins can be adjusted with Edge erase adjustment. <<2>> Printing Mode There are 2 printing modes available to this system. The soft switch (MODE 007) toggles these modes. They are valid only for printing received documents. [1] Automatic reduction mode If the length of a received document exceeds the printable area, this mode cuts off the document within the cutting length specified with the soft switch (MODE 007). If the excess length is longer than the specified cutting off length, the document will be reduced within the upper limit of reducing the size specified with the soft switch (MODE 007). [2] Cut off mode If the length of a received document exceeds the printable area, this mode cuts off the document within the cutting length specified with the soft switch (MODE 007). (No reduction.)

3-68

<<3>> Paper Selection Mode (facsimile) This system has the following modes for selecting paper. The soft switch (MODE 008) toggles these modes. They are valid only for printing received documents. [1] Standard mode This mode selects paper to avoid document splitting as much as possible. Example Available sizes of paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11 X 17 Lengthwise Size of received document : 11 X 17 Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the 11 X 17 paper without reduction. If the 11 X 17 paper has run out, the Letter Lengthwise paper will be used with reduction. [2] Width preference mode This mode selects paper whose width is the same as or smaller than a received document. (Example) Available sizes of print paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11 X 17 Lengthwise Size of received document : Letter Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the Letter paper with reduction. If the Letter paper has run out, the printing job will be halted and wait for new paper. [3] Fixed width mode This mode selects paper whose width is the same as a received document. (Example) Available sizes of paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11 X 17 Lengthwise Size of received document : 11 X 17 Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the Letter paper with reduction. If the Letter paper has run out, the printing job will be halted and wait for new paper.

Note: The standard and the preference modes have 4 different submodes. Each of them has priorities for selection. (Users can select only submode1.)
Submode 1 : Submode 2 : Submode 3 : Sub mode 4 : Selecting a paper whose width is the same as a received document without reduction. Selecting a paper whose width is the same as a received document with minimum margins (minimum non printing area). Selecting a paper to print out without reduction. (The width will not be considered.) Selecting a paper with minimum nonprinting area. (The width will not be considered.)

3-69

The following table summarizes the effective print length for paper which this system can use : L: Lengthwise, C: Crosswise ( Unit: mm ) Print paper size Letter L Letter C Legal L Ledger L (11 x 17) INVOICE L INVOICE C Print paper size Effective print size Remark Sub scanning Main scanning Sub scanning Main scanning length length length length 215.9 279.4 215.9 279.4 139.7 215.9 279.4 215.9 355.6 431.8 215.9 139.7 207.4 271.4 207.9 271.4 131.7 207.9 271.4 207.9 347.6 423.8 207.9 131.7 Note 1 Note 1

Note 1: Available only with a multi-purpose tray or manual feeding (Copy and PC print).

3-70

Chapter 4

REPORTS

4-1. LIST OF REPORTS

: available Report name Transmission TRANSMISSION REPORT management SERIAL BROADCAST REPORT TRANSMISSION REPORT (incompleted) Statistical ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) Auto print Manual print : not available Reference Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual 4-2-1 4-2-2 Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual Operators Manual (TX) Operators Manual 4-2-3 4-2-4 4-2-4 (TX) 4-2-5

management ACTIVITY REPORT (RX) USER ACCOUNT REPORT Memory MEMORY CLEAR REPORT management ONE-TOUCH DIAL # LIST List ABBR. DIAL # LIST FAX PROGRAM LIST BULLETIN BOARD LIST RELAY GROUP LIST USER LIST USER MANEGEMENT LIST SETTING LIST Relay RELAY REPORT management G3 PROTOCOL TRACE Maintenance MEMORY DUMP FILE DUMP SERVICE CALL REPORT

Note: Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 3) is necessary to include communication error codes in a report. Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 7) is necessary to include the number of pages in a report. The soft switch (MODE 023 Bit 3) can specify a transmission report with or without the image merge function. Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 5) is necessary to include the transmission speed in an Activity Report (TX/RX).

4-1

4-2. HOW TO READ DATA OF REPORTS

4-2-1. ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)
ACTIVITY REPORT ( TX )
DOCUMENT# 5500000-000 5500000-002 5500000-003 5500000-004 5512345-005 5512345-006 TOTAL TIME SENT 14:04, 14:12, 14:23, 14:30, 16:54, 17:01, 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 DURATION 22" 59" 29" 15" 5" 8" 2'18" DESTINATION 2164 2164 2164 2164 1 1

(FRI) MAY 28 1999 15:16 MODE ECM ECM ECM PAGE 2 0 3 1 0 0 6 sheets RESULT OK INTERR OK OK INTERR INTERR USER NAME 312 24 312 312 24 24

Transmisson speed (See Note) Printing Communication results - Condition Printing a communication mode - Condition 1 2 For using multiport port 1 For using multiport port 2 For using Single port OK BUSY NO ANS INTERR PT DEL F MEM. NG Good Busy No response Interuption Incomplete broadcasting Memory overflow No broadcasting at all

Printing the number of transmitted pages - Condition -

RY BR BR .C BR RY TX ECM.B G3 .B .B ECM.C G3 .C .C .N ECM.P G3 .P .P ECM G3

I.Pages for Tx = pages of completed Relay broadcast Tx Orher than the above Confidential broadcast Tx Broadcast Tx (including broadcast relay Tx) Communication error codes Relay Tx Pages fo Tx 000000 Bach Tx (ECM) : Bach Tx (G3) FFFFFF : Bach Tx (with unspecified communication mode) NG 1 For disabled display Pages of Confidential Tx (ECM) : of error code completed Tx Confidential Tx (G3) 10 (Same expression Confidential Tx (with unspecified communication mode) 1 : as broadcasting) Bulletin board (with unspecified communication mode) : 999 or more 999 Polling Tx (ECM) 10 Polling Tx (G3) : Polling Tx (with unspecified communication mode) 999 or more 999 ECM Tx G3 Tx Other than the above II.Pages for Tx = pages of completed Tx or without parentheses by soft switch

Pages of completed Tx 0 : 10 : 100 : 999

999 or more

Note: Printing reports: With automatic LOGOUT: All information on 50 communication activities will be printed. With manual printing : All information on the last 50 communication activities (if there are over 50 activities). Communication error codes will be listed only when requested to print (MODE 020 Bit 3). Transmission speed on the right side requires the soft switch setting (MODE 020 Bit 5).
- Condition 336 33.6K : 144 14.4K : 24 2.4K

4-2

4-2-2. ACTIVITY REPORT (RX)

ACTIVITY REPORT ( RX )
DOCUMENT# 0000000-000 0000000-001 0000000-002 5534567-002 5534567-003 5534567-004 5534567-005 5534567-006 5534567-007 TOTAL TIME RCVED 14:06, 14:06, 14:07, 14:07, 14:09, 14:12, 14:17, 14:27, 14:28, 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 5/27 DURATION 16" 15" 13" 23" 20" 20" 11" 11" 23" 2'32" DESTINATION

(FRI) MAY 28 1999 15:16 MODE PAGE 0 0 0 1 1 4 1 1 1 9 sheets RESULT NG NG INTERR OK OK OK OK OK OK USER NAME 24 24 24 144 144 312 288 312 144

ECM ECM ECM ECM ECM ECM

Transmisson speed (See Note) Printing Communication results - Condition Printing a communication mode - Condition 1 2 For using multiport port1 For using multiport port2 For using Single port OK BUSY NO ANS INTERR F MEM. B. PRT. NG Good Busy No response Interuption Memory overflow Before completing printing No broadcasting at all Orher than the above Communication error codes Received pages : 1 000000 : FFFFFF NG

Printing the number of printed pages - Condition I.Received pages = Printed pages

ECM.C G3 .C .C ECM.P G3 .P .P ECM.R G3 .R .R ECM G3

Confidential broadcast Rx (ECM) Confidential broadcast Rx (G3) Confidential Rx (with unspecified communication mode) Polling Rx (ECM) Polling Rx (G3) Polling Rx (with unspecified communication mode) Relay Rx (ECM) Relay Rx (G3) Relay Rx (with unspecified communication mode) ECM Rx G3 Rx Other than the above

: Printed pages 10 1 : : 999 or more 999 10 : 999 or more 999

For disabled display of error code (Same expression as broadcasting)

Example: "Printed pages = 2 when receiving an A4 document and printing on 2 sheets of A5 paper.

II.Received pages = Printed pages or without parentheses by soft switch

Printed pages 0 : 10 : 100 : 999 or more 999

1167M135AA

Notes: Printing reports: With automatic LOGOUT: All information on 50 communication activities will be printed. With manual printing : All information on the last 50 communication activities (if there are over 50 activities). Communication error codes will be listed only when requested to print (MODE 020 Bit 3). Transmission speed on the right side requires the soft switch setting (MODE 020 Bit 5).
- Condition 336 33.6K : 144 14.4K : 24 2.4K

4-3

4-2-3. G3 PROTOCOL TRACE

Protocol trace: Each communication processes information on a protocol trace. If you wish to print it, go to the maintenance mode to press <Utility>. Then touch [Report 1] to specify [Protocol Trace].
27F51E5E 27F51F08 NSF NSS FF 13 22 00 00 49 0C D2 FF 03 20 00 00 49 40 00 00 00 00 C8 C8 .... 34 7D 02 00 DA 80 7E 04 86 10 89 20 19 50 7C 20 .... 00 26 00

Command name

Data of each command

Note: Specify FCF names with capital letters for signals at 300 bps, otherwise use small letters. If the information of a single frame is longer than a single line, the next line will also be used. This will be repeated as necessary. If there is no FCF name corresponds to the data in the FCF field, "?" will be displayed in the FCF name field. If the information cannot be printed in a single sheet of a specified paper, the excess information will be printed on the next paper.

4-2-4. MEMORY DUMP & FILE DUMP

Memory dump and file dump have the same format.
00080000 00080020 3653B850348ED88D365B01E878005B07 54A3B700F6443401740B804C34808064 6C.P4...6....... T....D4....L4...

Prints physical address 00000000 : FFFFFFFF

Prints contents

Prints ASCII code of the contents

4-4

4-2-5. SERVICE CALL REPORT

SERVICE CALL REPORT REPORT CONTENTS : DATE CALLED : USER INFO TEL1 ISDN TEL2 ID CALL CONDITION TRANS.METHED: DATA CALL# : G3-1 : FAX DEST. # : INFO. CALL : # OF PRINT : OFF PRT MALFUNCTION : ON PRT OPTION :OFF SCANNER MALFUNCTION : ON NO TONER NOTICE : ON TONER EMOTY : ON DRUM LIFE :ON TONER / DRUM A NEAR LIFE TONER / DRUM A LIFE : ON TONER / DRUM B NEAR LIFE : ON TONER / DRUM B LIFE : ON SERIAL # : ABCDE12345 ROM REV

You can output the service call report to your terminal manually. The service call report will be transmitted to the Service Center automatically with a specified alarm. When this report is transmitted, it always includes TSI (even if this function is disabled). [1] Report contents This report has the reason for transmission and the date of transmission. Contents: # OF PRINT PRT MALFUNCTION PRT OPTION MALFUNCTION SCANNER OPTION MALFUNCTION TONER/DRUM A NEAR LIFE (Status A) TONER/DRUM A LIFE (Status B) TONER/DRUM B NEAR LIFE (Status C) TONER/DRUM B LIFE (Status D) DATE CALLED

4-5

[2] User and terminal information This report has various information on users and terminals of your facsimile system. (1) Phone number The following information will be printed as phone number: Contents: ID USER INFO TEL1 USER INFO TEL2 (2) The dialing condition of transmitting the service call report Contents: TRANS. METHED (DATA/REPORT) CALL # # OF PRINT PRT MALFUNCTION PRT OPTION MALFUNCTION SCANNER OPTION MALFUNCTION NO TONER NOTICE TONER EMPTY DRUM LIFE TONER/DRUM A NEAR LIFE (Status A) TONER/DRUM A LIFE (Status B) TONER/DRUM B NEAR LIFE (Status C) TONER/DRUM B LIFE (Status D) (3) SERIAL # Contents: SERIAL # (4) ROM REV Contents: MAIN (MSC) PRINTER ADFR LCC FINISHER (5) INSTALL DATE Contents: INSTALL DATE (6) MAINTENANCE DATE Contents: MAINTENANCE DATE

4-6

(7) MACHINE CONFIGURATION Contents: F MEM (7.6/8.0/15.6/23.6/47.6/55.6MB) R MEM (8.3/0.0MB) WORK MEMORY (4.0/16.0MB) FAX (ON/OFF) PORT (SINGLE/MULTI) LINE (PSTN1 or PSTN1+PSTN2) PC PRINT ADF (NONE/ADF/ADFR) TX MARKER (ON/OFF) BS/IR (ON/OFF) SCAN SPEED (25/35ppm) SCAN QUALITY (400/600dpi) PRINT SPEED (18/25ppm) I/C TYPE (T-1,T-2,T-3,T-4) 2 SIDED (ON/OFF) JOB TRAY (ON/OFF) SHIFT TRAY (ON/OFF) FINISHER (ON/OFF) MAIL FINISHER (ON/OFF) TTL COUNT (ON/OFF) SIZE SSR OPT (ON/OFF) CASSETTE 1 TO 5 (8) VARIOUS SETTINGS Contents: AUTO PAPER MODE (INCH/METRIC) FLS COPY MODE (1-SIDED/2-SIDED OR 2-SIDED ONLY) ANTI-DEW (SCAN or SCAN & DRUM or NO FUNCTION) LTD COPY (OFF/ON) PAPER SIZE INPUT (2ND Cassette) PAPER SIZE INPUT (3RD Cassette) PAPER SIZE INPUT (4TH Cassette) PAPER SIZE INPUT (5TH Cassette) ERASURE WIDTH ZOOM (LGL LTR) ZOOM (11 x 15 LTR) ZOOM (11 x 17 LTR) ZOOM (x 0.5) ZOOM (LGL 11 x 17) ZOOM (LTR 11 x 17) LGL) ZOOM (51/2 x 81/2 ZOOM (x 2.0) ZOOM (FULL SIZE) TOTAL COUNTER SIZE COUNTER COPY KIT COUNTER PLUG-IN COUNTER KEY COUNTER VENDER MODE

4-7

[3] Counter information (1)TOTAL COUNTER Service call report has 9 various counter information for TOTAL COUNTER. (2)PAPER COUNTER Service call report has 17 various counter information for PAPER COUNTER. (3)JAM COUNTER Service call report has 30 various counter information for JAM COUNTER. (4) PM COUNTER Service call report has 24 various counter information for PM COUNTER. (5) TROUBLE COUNTER Service call report has 36 various counter information for TROUBLE COUNTER. [4] Adjustment information (1) For scanner NADF MAIN REG NADF SUB REG NADF M-SCAN % (COPY) NADF S-SCAN % (COPY) NADF M-SCAN % (FAX) NADF S-SCAN % (FAX) BK-S M-SCAN REG BK-S S-SCAN REG BK-S M-SCAN % (COPY) BK-S S-SCAN % (COPY) BK-S M-SCAN (FAX) BK-S S-SCAN (FAX) ADFR DOC. STOP (1-SIDED) ADFR DOC. STOP (2-SIDED) ADFR DOC. STOP (SINGLE FD) ADFR REGISTRATION LOOP Note: NADF corresponds to ADF in Minolta. (2) For printer (Printer corresponds to Copier in Minolta.) REGIST. (CD) 1ST REGIST. (CD) 2ND REGIST. (CD) 3RD REGIST. (CD) 4TH REGIST. (CD) 5TH REGIST. (CD) 2-SIDED REGIST. (FD) LOOP ADJ. (1ST) LOOP ADJ. (OTHERS) LOOP ADJ. (2-SIDED & MAN) EDGE ERASE LEAD EDGE ERASE TRAIL EDGE ERASE (R/L) ID ATDC SENSOR GAIN VG

4-8

[5] Error LOG information (1) History of misfeeds This report contains and prints the last 10 misfeed incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted. Misfeed information: Date and time of misfeeds Location of jams (scanner or copier) (2) History of system malfunctions This report contains and prints the last 10 incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted. Information on malfunction: Date and time of malfunctions Malfunction codes (3) History of communication errors This report contains and prints the last 10 incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted. Information on communication error: Date and time of communication errors Communication error codes [6] Information on soft switches Main product This report has information on the soft switches of the main product (512 byte). The default setting will also be printed for the switch that was set up differently.

4-9

Chapter 5

SETUP FOR FAX OPTION

5-1. CONNECT THE PHONE CABLES

[1] Connect cables from the phone line and other devices with the system as shown below. External Port Plate 2 1 4 3

LINE PORT2

TEL LINE PORT1 OPTION

No. 1 2 3 4 TEL

Name LINE OPTION LINE(PORT2) Phone line

Connect to Extra telephone set PC print option Phone line (PORT2)

Remark Standard Standard Option Option

[2] Connect the power source cable. This facsimile uses the rated voltage of 120 10V, 50/60Hz. The power source line must be rated more than 11A.

5-1

5-2. OPTIONAL PRODUCTS SETUP

5-2-1. OPTIONAL MEMORY BOARD
[1] Precaution (1) Keep all packing materials out of the reach of children. (2) Before starting the installation work, check to see that the storage memory has been cleared to 0%. If the amount of memory used is not 0%, get the customer's approval to output or erase the contents of the memory. After confirming that the memory has been cleared to 0%, set the POWER SOURCE SW to OFF. (3) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable from CN6 provided on the MFB board before mounting the add-on memory. If you forget to disconnect the cable, damage to the memory IC could result. [2] Installation (1) Remove 2 screws and Upper Cover.

(2) Remove 4 screws and MFB Box Cover.

(3) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable.

NOTE: Disconnect the NiCd battery cable from the provided on the MFB board to stop the supply of the power from the NiCd battery to the add-on memory.

5-2

(4) Insert an add-on memory card into its appropriate slot. 1 2

8MB Memory (ROT08) 16MB Memory (ROT16)

32MB Memory (TMEM)

EMU Memory

1 2

Note: Do not touch the electric connection edge of the memory board with bare hands. Make sure of the orientation of the board for proper insertion. The memory board has a notch. Insert it until you hear a click sound. See Section 8-3-5 "System Setup << 3 >> System Configuration."
(5) Reconnect the NiCd battery cable to CN6 provided on the MFB board as before.

Note: If you forget to reconnect the battery cable, no backup will be made in the event of a power failure. Be sure to reconnect the battery cable.
(6) Reattach the Upper Cover and MFB Box Cover. [3] INSPECTION PROCEDURES (1) Make sure the installation has been completed properly. (2) Make sure that the volume of memory has increased. 1) Select SERVICE MODE 2) Touch [System Input] - [Configure] 3) Check volume of memory

5-3

5-2-2. TX (TRANSMISSION) MARKER

[1] Precaution See Section 5-2-1 [1] Precaution [2] Installation (1) Remove 2 screws from the backside of the ADF. (2) Open the Take-Up Cover of the Document Loading Tray to remove a screw. (3) Open the ADF to remove a screw from the right corner. (4) Remove 2 fixtures. (5) Detach the ADF cover (R). 5 1 2 ADF Rear Cover

Take-Up Cover 4

3 Document Loading Tray

(6) Remove 4 screws and the cushion from the back side of the ADF cover.

(7) Remove the bracket (G).

5-4

(8) Attach the TX Marker to the backside of the scanner unit.

NOTE: The shaft of the TX Marker should not come out.

(9) Feed the cables of the TX Marker into the side of the scanner unit where the motor is located.

9 (10) Connect the cables of the TX Marker to the connector of the ACR (CN-7) (MARKER)

CN7

(11) Lead the ink stamp into the TX Marker.

(12) Reassembling Reassemble the unit in the reverse direction of the disassembling steps of this section.

Note: Make sure that the cables are not caught by the unit while reassembling. Fix screws to make the intervals between adjacent covers even.
[3] Setup/Inspection Setup (1) Go to the initial setup mode and set the system model "With Marker." (2) Set the items for TX Marker under "Mode 000" of the soft switch. Inspection Press <FAX> and select [Setup 1] from [FAX Menu] to set how to operate TX Marker. Carry out a test transmission to confirm the operation of the TX Marker.

5-5

5-2-3. G3 MULTI-PORT
[1] Precaution See Section 5-2-1 [1] Precaution [2] Installation (1) Remove 2 screws and Upper Cover. See Section 5-2-1 [2] (1) (2) Remove 4 screws and MFB Box Cover. (3) Unplug five connectore of the MFB Board.

2 3

(4) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable. See Section 5-2-1 [2] (3) (5) Remove 2 screws and the MFB Box Assy.

(6) Replacing NROM Board. If the kit has check mark made on the outer case marking NR-168857-011/ -02, replace or mount the NROM board.

NROM board

5-6

(7) Mount the NCUK Board on the MFB Box Assy. Check to ensure that connectors and card spacers have been securely inserted. Secure the board with a screw. NCUK board Card spacer

(8) Mount the module in such a way that sheet metal will be sandwiched in between. (Line up the bars of the holder and module) Cable to be connected to: NCUK board (CN101) and LINE PORT2 slot. Secure the cable with cable clamps in 4 places. PSTN Holder

PORT2 slot

Clamp

NCUK board (CN101)

5-7

(9) Mount the MPK board on the MFB Box Assy. Check to ensure that the connectors and card spacers have been securely inserted.

Card spacer

MPK board

(10) Mount the cable between MPK and NCUK. Cable to be connected to: MPK board (CN2) and NCUK board (CN5). MPK board (CN2)

NCUK board (CN5)

(12) Reassembling Reassemble the unit in the reverse direction of the disassembling steps of this section.

Note: Make sure that the cables are not caught by the unit while reassembling. Fix screws to make the intervals between adjacent covers even.
[3] Setup/Inspection Setup (1) Setting the copier model in the initialization mode, select Port Type and Line Type. (2) For verification set the power switch to ON. Peform the following procedures to verify that data can be transmitted and received without any error. PSTN line (2 lines) check (1) Place a call from PSTN2 to PSTN1. (2) In the on-hook state, place a manual call from PSTN1 to PSTN2.

5-8

Chapter 6

DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT

6-1. OVERVIEW
6-1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

125V 3.15A

Power Supply Unit 2 PU2 125V 5A

125V 5A

Master Board PWB-A 125V 3A (F1) 125V 3A (F2) 250V 1A (F3) 250V 1A (F4) Power Supply Unit 1 PU1 125V 10A (F1) 125V 15A (F2) 250V 3.15A (F3) 250V 3.15A (F4)

Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse TF1 125V 15A

Fusing Roller Thermostat TS1 250V 10A

6-1-2. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

The laser used in this copier is a semiconductor laser having the following specifications. Max. power: Output wavelength: 5mW 770~810nm

When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC Drum, be sure first to turn the copier OFF. If the job requires that the copier be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles. A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use utmost care when handling tools on the users premises. The printerhead is not maintainable in the field. It is to be replaced as an assembly including the control board. Never, therefore, attempt to remove the laser diode or adjust trimmers on the control board.

6-1

6-1-3. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBS WITH MOS ICS

The following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) ICs. During Transportation/Storage: During transportation or when in storage, new P .W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed from their protective conductive bags. Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight. When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity. Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands. During Replacement: Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the outlet. When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board. Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet. During Inspection: Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the PW Board, be sure to ground your body.

6-1-4. HANDLING OF THE IMAGING CARTRIDGE

During Transportation/Storage: Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the Imaging Cartridge. The storage temperature is in the range between 20C and +40C. In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time. Handling: Ensure that the correct Imaging Cartridge is used. Store the Imaging Cartridge in a site that is not exposed to direct sunlight. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge: The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, fingerprints, and other foreign matter. Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.

6-2

6-1-5. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED

<< 1 >> Red Painted Screws Purpose of Application of Red Paint Red painted screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be readjusted, set, or removed in the field. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. <<2>> Variable Resistors on Board Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in ADJUSTMENT. <<3>> Other Screws Although not marked with red paint, the following screws must not be loosened or readjusted. 8 screws on the PH Unit Cover

6-3

6-2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
6-2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES

4 5

1 15 6 7 8 9 14 13 12 11 10 16

17 18

34 33 32 31 19 20

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 22 23

21

6-4

No. 1

Part Name ADF Glass Assy.

Removal Procedure Remove No. 2, 4. Remove two holding brackets. Remove two screw caps. Remove two screws that secure the ADF Glass Assy. Remove No. 17, 18. Remove two screw caps. Remove two screws that secure the Rear Holding Bracket. Remove No. 4. Remove two holding brackets. Remove two screw caps. Remove two screws that secure the Front Holding Bracket. Remove No. 8. Remove No. 6. Remove No. 4. Remove No. 12. Remove five screws that secure the control panel and unplug one connector.

2 3 4 5

Rear Holding Bracket Original Glass Front Holding Bracket Control Panel

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Front Upper Cover Remove No. 8. Remove No. 12. Remove six screws that secure the Front Upper Cover. Exit Lower Cover Front Cover LED Cover MP Cassette 500-Sheet Cassette Upper Front Left Cover Left Cover Upper Cover Left IR Cover Original Cover Rear Right IR Cover Left Hinge Cover Remove No. 22. Remove No. 19. Remove two screws that secure the Rear Right IR Cover. Remove one screw that secures the Left Hinge Cover. Remove No. 32. Remove No. 24. Unhook the two tabs of the Exit Lower Cover and remove the Exit Lower Cover. Slide out No. 10. Open No. 25. Remove three screws that secure the Front Cover. Slide out No. 10. Remove one screw that secures the LED Cover. Slide out the MP Cassette. Pushing the tab on the right rail, pull out the cassette. Slide out the 500-Sheet Cassette. Pushing the tabs on both the right and left rails, pull out the cassette. Remove No. 4. Remove two screws that secure the Upper Front Left Cover. Remove six screws that secure the Left Cover. Remove two screws that secure the Upper Cover. Remove two screws that secure the Left IR Cover.

Rear Left IR Cover Remove No. 17. Remove two screws that secure the Rear Left IR Cover. Rear Upper Cover Remove No. 21. Remove No. 17. Remove No. 19. Remove four screws that secure Rear Upper Cover. Rear Lower Cover Remove No. 26. Remove No. 25. Open No. 30. Open No. 32. Remove five screws that secure the Rear Lower Cover. Right Hinge Cover Remove one screw that secures the Right Hinge Cover. Connector Cover Remove one screw that secures the Connector Cover. Rear Inside Cover Remove No. 22. Remove three screws that secure the Rear Inside Cover.

22 23 24

6-5

No. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Part Name

Removal Procedure

Toner Bottle Cover Open the Toner Bottle Cover. Unhook the dowels at four places of the Toner Bottle Cover. Harness Cover Duplex Unit Rear Cover 500-Sheet Cassette Side Cover Manual Bypass Tray Side Cover Duplex Unit Fusing Unit Remove two screws that secure the Duplex Unit. See D-26. Remove one screw that secures the Harness Cover. Remove No. 31. Remove two screws that secure the Duplex Unit Rear Cover. Open the Side Cover. Slide the Side Cover to the front and, at the same time, pull the rear side out of the frame. Remove No. 26. Unplug one connector. Remove three screws that secure the Manual Bypass Tray.

Front Inside Cover Remove No. 8. Remove No. 32. Remove two screws that secure the Front Inside Cover. Right IR Cover Remove three screws that secure the Right IR Cover.

6-6

6-2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs contained in SWITCHES ON PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.

PU2 PWB-R INV BCR

HGB CCD

PWB-L

UN1

UN2 UN3

PWB-R PWB-A PWB-R

PWB-A

PWB-I PWB-A PU1 PWB-N HV1

PWB-H

6-7

Symbol

Part Name

Removal Procedure Remove the Upper Cover. Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. Remove two screws and the MFB Box Assy. PWB-A Remove the Connector Cover. PWB-A Remove the Duplex Unit. Remove the Duplex Unit Rear Cover. PWB-A

PWB-A Master Board

PWB-A Cassette Main Board PWB-A Duplex Main Board

PWB-H Double Feed Detecting Slide out the MP Cassette. Remove one screw and Board the PWB-H Mounting Bracket Assy. PWB-H PWB-I Paper Size Detecting Board PPM Switching Board Remove the Harness Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove two screws and the PW Board Cover. PWB-I Remove the Harness Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove one screw and the PWB-L Mounting Bracket Assy. PWB-L Remove the Upper Cover. Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. PWB-N Remove the Fusing Unit. Remove the rear lamp cover. PWB-R Remove the Vertical Transport Unit. Remove two screws and two ground plates. PWB-R Open the Side Cover. Remove the Imaging Cartridge. Remove one screw and the PW Board Cover. PWB-R Remove the Harness Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Left Cover. Remove five screws and the Reinforcement Bracket. Remove three screws and the PU1 Mounting Bracket Assy. PU1 Remove the Harness Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. PU2 Open the Side Cover. Remove the Imaging Cartridge. Remove two screws and the HV1 Cover. HV1 Remove the Original Glass. INV Remove the Rear Left IR Cover. Remove three screws and the Harness Cover. BCR Remove the Original Glass. Remove the Right IR Cover. Remove the Optical Cover. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. Remove the Rear Upper Cover. Remove the Shielding Plate. (U.S.A. and Canada only) Remove one screw and the Harness Cover. Unplug nine connectors. Remove five screws and the HGB Mounting Bracket Assy. HGB See D-15.

PWB-L

PWB-N RAM Board PWB-R Fuser Frame Register Board PWB-R Pre-Transfer Guide Plate Register Board 1 PWB-R Pre-Transfer Guide Plate Register Board 2 PU1 Power Supply Board 1

PU2 HV1

Power Supply Board 2 High Voltage Unit

INV BCR HGB

Inverter Board BCR Board HGB Board

CCD

CCD Board

6-8

Symbol UN2 UN3

Part Name MFB Board Polygon Motor Drive Board

Removal Procedure Remove the Upper Cover. Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. UN2 Remove the PH Unit. UN3

6-9

6-2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTION

<<1>> Replacement of the Paper Take-Up Roll 1. Slide out the MP Cassette.

2. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate. 3. Snap off one C-clip of the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy. 4. Slide the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy to the rear so that it can be pulled off the bushing at the front.

5. Snap off one C-clip and remove and replace the Paper Take-Up Roll.

<<2>> Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover and replace it.

6-10

<<3>> Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover.

3. Using a brush, whisk dust and dirt off the Paper Dust Remover.

<<4>> Cleaning of the Side Cover Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Side Cover.

<<5>> Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Cover Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Cover.

6-11

6-2-4. OPTICAL SECTION

<<1>> Removal of the IR Unit 1. Remove the Original Cover, Front Holding Bracket, Upper Front Left Cover, Front Cover, Front Upper Cover, Rear Right IR Cover, Rear Left IR Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover, and Front Inside Cover. 2. Remove one screw and the Motor Cover.

3. Remove the Shielding Plate. (U.S.A. and Canada only) 4. Remove one screw and the Harness Cover.

5. Unplug eight connectors of the HGB Board.

6. Remove three screws and the Harness Cover. 7. Unplug one connector of the BCR Board.

8. Remove one screw and the Total Counter Mounting Bracket Assy. 9. Unplug one connector of the Control Panel. 10. Remove two screws that secure the front end of the frame.

6-12

11. Remove five screws that secure the rear end of the frame.

12. Raise the rear end of the IR Unit and pull the unit out toward front.

<<2>> Removal of the PH Unit

NOTES Do not place the PH Unit upside down or subject it to excessive shock. Replace the PH Unit as one unit. NEVER attempt to disassemble or adjust the PH Unit. Whenever the PH Unit has been removed, make the following adjustments: Edge Erase, Registration (CD, FD, Printer), Registration (IR).
1. Remove the Upper Cover, Front Cover, Left Cover, and Rear Cover. 2. Remove four screws and the MFB Box Cover. 3. Unplug five connectors of the MFB Board.

4. Remove two screws and the MFB Box Assy.

6-13

5. Remove five screws and the Reinforcement Bracket. 6. Remove four screws and the handle.

7. Unplug all connectors (13) from Master Board PWB-A.

8. Remove the harness from all cord clamps (12) on the PH Base Plate.

9. Remove four screws and the PH Unit.

6-14

<<3>> Removal of the CCD Unit 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2. Remove four screws and the Cover.

3. Unplug two connectors of the CCD Unit. 4. Remove two screws and the CCD Unit.

NOTES 1. When removing the CCD Unit, remove only those screws and parts that are specified. (Remove the CCD Unit as one unit.) 2. Whenever the CCD Unit has been replaced, make the following adjustment: FD of Zoom Adjust (IR).
<<4>> Cleaning of the Scanner Rails/Bushings 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2. Using a soft cloth, wipe clean the Scanner Rails and Bushings.

6-15

<<5>> Cleaning of the Mirrors 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2. Wipe clean the Mirrors with a soft cloth.

<<6>> Cleaning of the Lens 1. Remove the CCD Unit. 2. Wipe clean the Lens with a soft cloth.

<<7>> Cleaning of the Original Glass Wipe clean the Original Glass with a soft cloth.

<<8>> Removal of the Scanner 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2. Remove the Rear Holding Bracket. 3. Slide the Scanner to the position shown.

6-16

4. Remove one screw and unplug the connector of the Exposure Lamp. 5. Remove the flat cable of the Exposure Lamp.

6. Remove one screw and the Lamp Fixing Bracket.

Rear

7. Slide the Exposure Lamp to the front and remove it.

Front

8. Remove two screws and the Scanner.

6-17

<<9>> Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables 1. Remove the Original Glass and ADF Glass Assy. 2. Remove the Left IR Cover. 3. Remove the Scanner. 4. Unhook the spring of the cable on the hook side, one each at the front and in the rear.

5. Remove one screw and the Original Size Detection Sensor. V Inch Areas Option.

6. Snap off one E-ring and remove one mounting screw from the front pulley and slide the pulley to the rear.

7. Snap off one E-ring and remove one mounting screw from the rear pulley and slide the pulley to the front.

8. Remove the Scanner Drive Cable, hook end first.

6-18

<<10>> Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables Pulley H

Pulley F Pulley E Pulley D Pulley G Pulley B

Pulley C Pulley A

Front 1. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley as shown.

2. Wind the hook end of the Scanner Drive Cable two turns counterclockwise from the rear side to the front.

Cable on Hook End 3. Wind the bead end of the cable four turns clockwise from the front to the rear. Then, secure the cable with tape.

Cable on Bead End

NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

6-19

4. Slide the pulley to the front and install one mounting screw and one E-ring.

Pulley D

5. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley D and pulley C, then hook the bead onto the Adjustable Anchor.

Pulley C 6. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley A and pulley B.

Pulley B Pulley A

7. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in the Cable Guide and hook the spring.

Cable Guide

Rear 8. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley as shown.

6-20

9. Wind the hook end of the cable two turns counterclockwise from the front to the rear.

Cable on Hook End 10. Wind the bead end of the cable four turns clockwise from the rear to the front. Then, secure the cable with tape.

Cable on Bead End

NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

11. Slide the pulley toward the rear and install one mounting screw and one E-ring.

Pulley G Pulley H

12. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley H and pulley G and hook the bead onto the Adjustable Anchor.

Pulley E

13. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley E and pulley F.

Pulley F

6-21

14. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in the Cable Guide and hook the spring.

Cable Guide 15. Peel off the tape from the pulleys at the front and rear. 16. Mount the Scanner. 17. Mount the Original Size Detection Sensor. 18. Reinstall the Left IR Cover. 19. Reinstall the Original Glass and ADF Glass Assy. 20. Perform the Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. (For details, see ADJUSTMENT.)

NOTE Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed, be sure to make the following adjustment: CD of Zoom Adjust (IR).

6-22

6-2-5. IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION

<<1>> Removal of the Image Transfer Roller 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Raise the Image Transfer Guide Plate.

3. Remove the Image Transfer Roller and replace it.

NOTE Do not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Roller directly with bare hands.

<<2>> Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 1. Open the Side Cover.

6-23

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Comb Electrode.

NOTES Make sure the alcohol does not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Roller. When wiping the Comb Electrode, make sure the cloth is not caught by the ends of the combs.

<<3>> Cleaning of the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate.

NOTE Make sure the alcohol does not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Roller.

<<4>> Replacement of the Ozone Filter 1. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. 2. Pull out the Ozone Filter and replace it.

6-24

6-2-6. DEVELOPING SECTION

<<1>> Removal of the Imaging Cartridge 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Holding onto the green handles, slide the Imaging Cartridge part of the way out. 3. Then grasp the handle on top of the cartridge and pull the cartridge out.

NOTE When installing the Imaging Cartridge, push it all the way into the machine. If the cartridge is not properly installed, the PC Drum protective shutter of the cartridge may not be opened or may even be damaged.

6-25

6-2-7. FUSING SECTION

<<1>> Removal of the Fusing Unit 1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Remove the Front Cover. 3. Unplug one connector at the front.

4. Open the Exit Cover and unplug two connectors in the rear. 5. Close the Exit Cover and remove two screws and the Fusing Unit.

<<2>> Removal of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp, Fusing Right Roller, Fusing Left Roller, Fusing Roller Thermistor, Fusing Roller Thermostat, and Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse 1. Open the Exit Cover. 2. Remove one screw and the Fusing Front Cover.

6-26

3. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Exit Cover.

4. Unhook one spring to free the Idle Lever. 5. Remove two harnesses. 6. Remove two screws and the Rear Cover.

Di350f

7. Di350f: Remove three screws and the rear Lamp Holder.

Di250f

Di250f Remove two screws and the rear Lamp Holder.

Di350f

Di350f 8. Remove one screw and the front Lamp Holder. 9. Remove one screw and the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp.

Di250f

Di250f 8. Remove one screw and the front Lamp Holder. 9. Remove the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp.

6-27

10. Remove two screws and the Fusing Rear Guide Assy. 11. Remove two pressure springs.

12. Snap off one E-ring and remove the front Misfeed Clearing Lever Assy and bearing. 13. Remove the Fusing Right Roller.

14. Snap off two retaining rings. 15. Remove one gear and two bushings. 16. Remove the Fusing Left Roller.

NOTE When the Fusing Left Roller is removed, it can cause the spring to come off the Separator Finger. After the Fusing Left Roller has later been reinstalled, be sure to hook the spring onto the Separator Finger.

17. Remove one screw and the Fusing Roller Thermistor. 18. Remove two screws and the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse. 19. Remove two screws and the Fusing Roller Thermostat.

6-28

6-3. ADJUSTMENT
6-3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED
1. Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs

6-29

6-3-2. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION

Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2. Remove four screws and the Cover.

3. Loosen the two screws that secure the Scanner Motor. Using a bar tension gage, pull the motor to the right with a tension of 1000 g 50 g and, at the same time, tighten the mounting screws.

NOTE After the adjustment, turn the timing belt to check that the belt teeth are in mesh with the pulley grooves.

6-30

6-3-3. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage

NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed: After the Scanner Drive Cable has been replaced. When the Scanner Fixing Bracket has been removed from the Scanner Drive Cable. When the Scanner Drive Cable comes unwound.
Requirement With the Scanner fixed to the Scanner Drive Cables, there should be no gap between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the Scanner and also between the Scanner/ Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Adjustment Procedure 1. Remove the Exposure Lamp. (For details, see steps 1 through 7, (8) Removal of the Scanner, 2-4 OPTICAL SECTION.) 2. Temporarily loosen the set screws of the cable holding plate of the Scanner Drive Cable.

3. Fit the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs in the space between the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.

Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig

4. Press the Scanner up against the jig and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and, at the same time, tighten the set screws of the cable holding plate.

2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Scanner

6-31

Adjusting Screw

NOTE If the Scanner does not run parallel with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage when the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs are in position, turn the adjusting screw for the rear Scanner Drive Cable as necessary.

V If the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs are not available, follow these steps to make the adjustment. 1. Temporarily loosen the set screws of the cable holding plate of the Scanner Drive Cable.

2. Obtain a distance of 13 mm between the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and rail. 13 mm

3. Secure the Scanner where it is located at a position 21 mm from the right side face. 4. Tighten the set screws of the cable holding plate. 21 mm

Adjusting Screw

NOTE If the Scanner does not run parallel with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage, turn the adjusting screw for the rear Scanner Drive Cable as necessary.

6-32

6-4. MISCELLANEOUS
6-4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE KEY COUNTER SOCKET (OPTION)
1. Remove the Front Cover. 2. Remove the knockout from the Front Upper Cover. 3. Using two screws, secure the Counter Mounting Bracket.

4. Route the harness of the Key Counter as shown.

5. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector. 6. Using two screws, secure the counter socket.

7. Using two screws, secure the Key Counter Cover.

NOTE When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, set to ON the Key Counter available from the Security mode.

6-33

6-4-2. REMOUNTING THE EEPROM (IC3A)

NOTES If the Imaging Cartridge is not to be replaced after the Master Board has been replaced with a new one, be sure to remount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the old to new Master Board. If the Master Board has been replaced with a new one and the EEPROM (IC3A) has not been remounted, be sure to replace the Imaging Cartridge with a new one. Because the EEPROM contains no data in this case, make settings and readjustments as necessary.
1. Remove the Master Board. (For details, see 2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.) 2. Demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the new Master Board. 3. Demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the old Master Board and remount it onto the new Master Board.

New EEPROM

Old EEPROM

New Master Board

Old Master Board

NOTE Note the alignment notch on the EEPROM (IC3A) when mounting the IC.
A

6-34

Chapter 7

CHECK

7-1. CHECK LIST

The steps of checking are to be performed according to the items in the following table. Table-Checking Point 1: Checking of System
Item Check for dirt and damage Method Standards Remarks

Visual check of exter- No abnormal dirt and External part (covers nal surface of damage should be and doors) exposed part found. Operational panel Paper drawer, and so on Visual and contact check of external exposed parts No dirt, loose or falling should be found. External part (covers) Operational panel Paper cassette, Glass assembly, Original glass and so on Various connectors Various cables

Check parts External Part

Check WIRING

Visual and contact check of external exposed parts Visual check inside equipment Visual and contact check: attachment condition of light source, engaging condition of gears, loose screws for attachment parts, carriage operation and so on

No loose contact, connection problem should be found.

Check for dirt and damage Check installation condition of parts

No abnormal dirt and Whole damage should be found. No loose, falling, or abnormal deformation, abnormal operation should be found. Light source part Optical reader Belt frame assembly Auxiliary roller assembly Gear plate assembly Separator roller assembly Fuser Resist guide Gear unit, and so on Various connectors Various cables NFB board and so on

Check WIRING

Visual and contact No loose contact, check:: connection problem loose soldering, should be found. touching of wiring, unconnected or loose connector, coating and exposure of cables, and so on Check the number of sheets regarding the reading system and the printing system by the accumulated number in the maintenance mode. The number of sheets specified by periodical maintenance.

Others

Check the number of sheets

See the details of each counter.

7-1

7-2. BATTERY REPLACEMENT

To replace the Ni-Cd battery, take the following procedure.
START

Check the amount of used memory displayed on the LCD.

0%?

N Turn OFF the machine. Y Transmitting?

Replace the battery.

Printout memory contents

Wait until transmission is completed. Turn ON the machine.

END

Note: Be sure to turn the machine ON after replacing the battery.

7-2

Chapter 8

MAINTENANCE FEATURE

8-1. OVERVIEW
The copier / facsimile has various maintenance features in addition to routine functions. They are categorized into 4 types: (1) Initialization mode This mode clears various data including initialization and default settings. (2) Maintenance mode This mode displays data on screen and reports. It is possible to carry out routine operations. (3) Service mode This mode is used for on-site adjustments such as setting service calls and printout papers. (4) Adjustment mode This mode is used for factory adjustments.

Note The maintenance mode is not disclosed to end-users. You need to turn off the Power switch and then turn it on to exit the maintenance mode once you complete necessary maintenance jobs.

8-1

8-2. MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATION PROCEDURES

The following table outlines the maintenance features and their procedures. Please see Section 8-3-1 Start-up to enter each mode. (1) Initialization mode No. 1 2 3 Features Port/Line TX Marker RAM Clear Description Selects type of port and line to be used. Selects ON/OFF setting when TX Marker option is installed. Clears BBRAM data of sender, receiver, communication management, printout image, and soft switch. Clears all BBRAM data. Procedure (ref.) 8-3-2 << 1 >> 8-3-2 << 2 >> 8-3-2 << 3 >>

4 5 6 7

All Clear

8-3-2 << 4 >> 8-3-2 << 5 >> 8-3-2 << 5 >> 8-3-2 << 6 >>

Serial number and Registers serial number and sets current date current date and time and time. Installation date Sets date of installation. Touch panel position Adjusts position of LCD touch panel. adjustment

(2) Maintenance mode No. 8 9 Features Memory contents Memory dump Description Displays data of RAM information. (Specifies absolute address) Prints a report on RAM information. (Specifies absolute address) Displays file information on screen. (Specifies file name) Prints a report on file information. (Specifies file name) Displays and changes setups of soft switches for maintenance. Procedure (ref.) 8-3-3 << 1 >> 8-3-3 << 2 >> 8-3-3 << 3 >> 8-3-3 << 4 >> 8-3-3 << 5 >> 8-3-2 << 6 >> 8-3-3 << 6 >>

10 File display 11 File dump 12 Soft switch set

13 Touch panel position Adjusts position of LCD touch panel. adjustment 14 File forward Forward information of image in file to another fax system.

8-2

(3) Service mode No. Features Description Operate system to adjust/check functions. Paper feed test, setup HV outputs, automatic adjustment of ATDC sensor (not available), and test pattern output. Sets up system environment, printer adjustment, ADFR adjustment. Sets up input paper size, fixed zoom ratio, system configuration display, factory serial number, permit Imaging Unit. Displays and changes values of various counters as reference data for checking. Displays each sensors status. Displays versions of ROMs. Confirms scanner functions by operating specified sections. Displays data of image stabilizer. Set up service call. Procedure (ref.) 8-3-7

15 Function

16 Service choice 17 System input

8-3-4 8-3-5

18 Counter 19 I/O check 20 ROM version 21 Movement check 22 Level history 23 FAX setting (4) Adjustment mode No. Features

8-3-6 8-3-8 8-3-10 8-3-9 8-3-11 8-3-12

Description Adjusts main scanner and sub scanner registration for each cassette

Procedure (ref.) 8-3-13 << 1 >> 8-3-13 << 2 >> 8-3-13 << 3 >>

24 Printer adjustment

25 Scanner adjustment Adjusts main/sub magnifications and registration for each ADF&BS. 26 Document size detection Adjusts document size sensor automatically.

8-3

8-3. DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATIONS

8-3-1. START-UP
You can start the maintenance mode in 3 different ways; (1) press <1> after warm start, (2) enter <1919...> + < > + <Panel Reset> on the dial input screen, and (3) enter a special password < (4 asterisks)> in [User Number] on the user selection screen. Each method has different maintenance features that can be carried out. (The start key LED flashes in orange.) Start-up Methods and Maintenance Features X : Enable Start-up Maintenance Features 1. Initialization (1) RAM Clear (2) All Clear (3) Serial number (4) Current time (5) Installation date 2. Maintenance mode 3. Service mode [1] Press <1> After Warm Start < Available features > (1) RAM Clear (2) All Clear (3) Serial number (4) Current time (5) Installation date (6) All other maintenance menus (in the maintenance and service modes) < How to start > (1) Turn on the power switch and wait for the standby screen. Then touch [WARM RESTART SWITCH]. - : Disable Enter Enter special Push <1> after <1919...(20 digits)>+ password on user warm start < >+<Panel Reset> selection screen on dial input screen X X X X X X X X X X X

(2) Press <1> of the 10-key pad while the system displays a phrase, [Under Processing...].

8-4

[2] Enter <1919...> < Available features > (1) All under the maintenance menu (in the service and maintenance modes). (The features from (1) to (7) described in [1] are unavailable.) < How to start > (1) Press <FAX> in the standby mode.

(2) Touch [10-key Dialing] and then enter <1919...> (20 digits).

(3) Press <

>.

(4) Press <Panel Reset>.

[3] User Selection Screen < Available features > (1) All under the maintenance menu (in the service and maintenance modes). (The features from (1) to (7) described in [1] are unavailable.)

8-5

< How to start > (1) Press <Access>. (2) Touch [User Number].

(3) Enter <

> (4 asterisks).

[4] Displaying Maintenance Menu (1) Press <Utility>. (2) Touch [Maint.], then [Service Mode] and [Maint Mode] will appear in the maintenance menu.

(3) The screen for the service mode will be displayed by touching [Service Mode].

8-6

(4) The screen for the maintenance mode will be displayed by touching [Maint Mode].

Now you can use various maintenance features.

Note The service mode and the maintenance mode are not disclosed to users at all. Care should be taken when you access these modes. Turn off the Power switch and then turn it on after a maintenance job to prevent changing setups accidentally.

8-3-2. INITIALIZATION
<< 1 >>Port/Line [1] Features (1) Setting per port type (2) Setting per line type [2] Procedure (1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1 [1].) (2) Select a port type. * Touch [Single] for the G3 type system. * Touch [Multi] if the system has G3 Multi-Port Option.

(3) Select a line type. Possible combination For single : highlight only [PSTN1]. For multi : highlight [PSTN1] and [PSTN2]. * Caution: Press the [ISDN] key of line type and rererse the indication to white. When the indication remains black, it will cause malfunction of the product. Select Auto/Manual in the line selection. (<Utility>-[Maint.]-[Administ.]-[TX Setting]-[TX Set3][Line Selection]) This can be done with the soft switch MODE 006 Bit 1 PSTN port automatic selection enable/disable. << 2 >> TX Marker [1] Features This feature is used to indicate when the TX marker option is installed. (The automatic 2 sided Document Feeder (ADFR) has no TX marker.)

8-7

[2] Procedure (1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1 [1].)

(2) Touch [Enter].

(3) To install TX Marker option, touch [ON] . Then touch [Enter]. The next screen displays RAM Clear described in Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>. << 3 >> RAM Clear [1] Features This feature clears the data stored in BBRAM such as self data (self-telephone number, self-password, TSI and so on) destination data (abbreviated dialing data, one-touch dialing data, programmed data and so on) activity data (TX data, RX data and so on) image data software switches all data [2] Procedure (1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1[1].)

(2) Touch [Enter].

8-8

(3) Touch [Enter].

(4) Touch the BBRAM item to be cleared (the item will be highlighted) and then touch [Enter]. * Touch the highlighted item again, then the highlighted display will be reset. (If it does not clear data, touch [Cancel].)

(5) Touch [Enter] to exit from this operation. The screen for the initial setting appears again. << 4 >> All Clear [1] Features This feature clears all data in BBRAM except adjustment settings and the accumulated values of counters. When you replace the board or ROM, you need to confirm that the counted numbers of pages will be displayed correctly. Therefore, you need to record the numbers before starting replacement. (See Section 8-3-6 Counter.) [2] Procedure (1) Go to the screen of RAM Clear (See Section 83-2 << 3 >> RAM Clear)

(2) Touch [All Clear].

8-9

(3) Touch [Enter]. * The last [Enter] completes this operation and returns the standby screen.

<< 5 >> Serial Number, Time and Date Setting, and Instalation Date [1] Features (1) Registering the serial number. (Usually, this is done before shipping.) (2) Setting the current date and time (year, month, day, hour, and minute). (3) Setting the date of installation. [2] Procedure (1) Touch [Enter] on the screen of RAM Clear (See Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>.)

(2) Touch [Serial Number].

(3) Type the serial number and then touch [Enter].

8-10

(4) Touch [Time and Date Setting].

(5) Type the current time. (Example) Type the data from the year to the minute. Then the input data will be interpreted as the order of [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], and [Minute] automatically. * For entering the data separately, touch [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], and [Minute] separately and type each data. (6) Touch [Enter].

(7) Touch [Installation Date].

(8) Type the date of installation and then touch [Enter].

(9) The last [Enter] completes the operation and returns the standby screen.

8-11

<< 6 >> Touch Panel Position Adjustment There are 2 ways to adjust the position of the touch panel: the initial setting, and the maintenance mode. This adjustment is required when you replace the touch panel. [1] Initial Setting (You can adjust the position of the touch panel in the initialization mode.) (1) Go to RAM Clear and then touch [Enter]. (See Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>.)

(2) Touch [TP Position Adj.].

(3) Touch [+] at the upper left corner. Touch the next [+] following the arrow symbol on screen in a clockwise direction. Repeat this step for all 4 corners. Push the center of each [+] with a fine soft felt pen. (4) The touch panel returns the standby screen after completing this routine. [2] Maintenance Mode (1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1 [1].) (2) Touch the utility maintenance menu [Maint Mode]. (See Section 8-3-1 [4].)

(3) Touch [TP Position Adj.].

(4) Touch [+] at the upper left corner. Touch the next [+] following the arrow symbol on screen in a clockwise direction. Repeat this step for all 4 corners. Push the center of each [+] with a fine soft felt pen. (5) The touch panel returns the maintenance mode.

8-12

8-3-3. MAINTENANCE MODE

<< 1 >> Memory Contents [1] Features This displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its absolute address which will be provided by our technical department. [2] Procedure (1) Type <1919...> or the special password to go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

(3) Touch [Mem. Contents].

(4) Input the address with the 10-key pad or the touch keys and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F).

(5) Touch [] or [] to change the address. (6) Touch [Enter] twice to return to the maintenance mode. << 2 >> Memory Dump [1] Features This displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its absolute address which will be provided by our technical department. [2] Procedure (1) Type <1919...> or the special password to go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.)

8-13

(2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

(3) Touch [Memory dump].

(4) Touch [Address]. (5) Input the address with the 10-key pad or the touch keys and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F). (6) Touch [Length]. (7) Input the length with the 10-key pad or the touch keys and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F).

(8) Touch [Enter] to return to the standby mode. << 3 >> File Display [1] Features This displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its file name. (The file name will be provided by our technical department.) [2] Procedure (1) Type <1919...> or the special password to go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

8-14

(3) Touch [File Display].

(4) Type the file name and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the alphanumeric code (0-9, A-Z). (For typing the file name, refer to the input method of the destination of one-touch dialing.)

(5) Touch []or [] to change the displayed address. ( : beginning display address + 30H.) (6) Touch [Enter] to return to the maintenance mode. << 4 >> File Dump [1] Features This outputs a report on the RAM data of MAIN-CPU by specifying its file name. [2] Procedure (1) Type <1919...> or the special password to go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

(3) Touch [File Dump].

(4) Type the file name and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the alphanumeric code (0-9, A-Z). (For typing the file name, refer the input method of the destination of one-touch dialing.) File dumping will be started and returns to the standby mode. (Standard display ... C:TRCFILE.DAT)

8-15

<< 5 >> Soft Switch Set [1] Features This sets up the soft switches for maintenance. [2] Procedure (1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

(3) Touch [Soft Switch Set].

(4) (5) (6) (7)

Touch [Mode Selection]. Type the value for a mode of the soft switch and then touch [Enter]. Touch [Bit Selection] or [HEX Selection]. Type the value of the soft switch with the 10-key pad and then touch [Enter]. Use <0> and <1> of the 10-key pad to type bit values. For hex numbers, use 0-9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. (8) The last [Enter] returns to the screen of the maintenance menu. << 6 >> File Forward [1] Features You can forward a received image data in a file to another facsimile with this feature. Use this feature under special circumstances to prevent loss of the image data - when your printer is out of order but you cannot turn off the system because there is an important document received. This feature should be run while opening the side cover on the right side of the main machine (after step (2) of the procedures). [2] Procedure (1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1).

8-16

(2) Touch [Activity List] on the standby screen and then touch [RX].

(3) Use []or [] to select a document for transferring. (4) Touch [Forward].

(5) Type the destination with the 10-key pad. Then touch [Enter] to start transferring. The print-queued document remains after transferring.

8-3-4. SERVICE CHOICE

[1] Features (1) System input: see Section 8-3-4 << 1 >> (2) ADFR adjustment: see Section 8-3-4 << 2 >> (3) Printer adjustment: see Section 8-3-4 << 3 >> [2] Procedures (1) Select [Service Choice] in the service mode.

(2) Select [System Set], [2 Sided ADF], or [Printer] on the screen of the service choice.

8-17

<< 1 >>System Input [1] Features (1) Automatic paper configuration mode < Function/default > Specifies the paper selection according to the result of the document size detection or from the A-size and B-size papers, at the time of APS. Valid for ADFR or the optional document size detection sensor. Display Inch/A-size, B-size Description Performs APS with the detected size. Converts the detected size to an optional size regardless of the country-specification. Converts the detected document size into a Inch size. Default X

Inch size

(2) Priority FLS setup < Function/default > Specifies the size of FLS. Display Description Default

F: 330 mm Use this size for detecting the universal size, the document C: 203 mm size, and the paper size for manual feed FLS setup. (Rounding off below decimal point) F: 330 mm The same as above C: 210 mm (Rounding off below decimal point) The same as above F: 330 mm C: 216 mm (Rounding off below decimal point) The same as above F: 330 mm C: 220 mm (Rounding off below decimal point) (3) Copy mode < Function/default > Specifies whether single-sided copy is displayed in the selection of the copy setup. (If you specify 1 Sided & 2 Sided, a new item, 1 Sided 1 Sided, will be added and become available in Document Copy setup.) Display 1 Sided & 2 Sided 2 Sided only Description Will not restrict document copy setup to 2 sided only. Will restrict document copy setup to 2 sided only. X Default X

8-18

(4) Anti-dew < Function/default > Specifies whether Dry Key Set is displayed in the utility user maintenance. If displayed, it specifies the parts to be done. Display Scanner Scanner & drum Disable Description Performs the dehumidify process for the scanner only. Performs the dehumidify process for the scanner and the drum. Will not display the dehumidify process. X Default

(5) Disable functions < Function/default > Specifies whether some functions in the copy mode should be disabled. Document copy and Application can be disabled.

Note This function is unavailable for PC print, i.e., no mode can be disabled.

Display OFF ON

Description No modes will be disabled. (All modes are available.) Two modes (Document copy and Application) can be disabled.

Default X

[2] Procedures (1) Touch [System Set] on the screen of the service choice screen. (See Section 8-3-4 Service Choice Screen.)

(2) Touch [Auto Paper Configuration] on the screen of the system setup. (3) Select [Inch/Metric] or [Inch].

8-19

(4) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen. (5) Touch [FLS Paper] on the screen of the system setup.

(6) Select one of the following choices: F : 330 mm F: 330 mm F: 330 mm F: 330 mm C : 203 mm C: 210 mm C: 216 mm C: 220 mm (7) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen. (8) Touch [1 Sided/2 Sided] on the screen of the system setup.

(9) Select [1 Sided & 2 Sided] or [2 Sided only]. (10) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen. (11) Touch [Dry Key Set] on the screen of the system setup.

(12) Select [Scanner only], [Scanner & Drum], or [Disable]. (13) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen. (14) Touch [Function Limit] on the screen of the system setup.

(15) Select [ON] or [OFF] and then touch [END].

8-20

<< 2 >> ADFR Adjustment (2 sided ADF) [1] Features (1) Document stop position adjustment < Function/default > Adjusts the stop position of documents for ADFR. Can adjust the positions for 1 Sided, 2 Sided, or Single feed mode, separately. - adjusts the position to the direction closer to the position for manual feeding, so that documents overlap with the scale, while + adjusts the position to the opposite direction, i.e., set documents away from the position for manual feeding.

Note Scale is the ruler part of the document size display.

Description 1 Sided mode 2 Sided mode Single feed mode -7 to +7 -6 to +7 -7 to +7

Default 0 0 0

(2) Registration loop adjustment < Function/default > Adjusts the amount of the document loop (looseness of a document) at the ADFR registtration roller to adjust the registtration. (This is done by putting the leading edge of a document to the registtration roller.) - for less loop while + for more loop. Description -5 mm to +5 mm [2] Procedures (1) Touch [2 Sided ADF] on the screen of the service choice. (See Section 8-3-4 Service choice.) Default 0

(2) Touch [Original Stop Position] on the ADFR screen.

8-21

(3) Adjust the position of document stop on the screen for document stop position. Clear the adjustment value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. Change the signs + or - with the ID key or the < >key. (4) Touch [END] to return to the ADFR screen. (5) Touch [Registration Loop] on the ADFR screen.

(6) Adjust the registtration loop on the screen for the registtration loop. Clear the adjustment value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. Change the signs + or - with ID key or < >key. (7) Touch [END] to return to the ADFR screen. << 3 >> Printer Adjustment [1] Features (1) Document feeder loop < Function/default > Adjusts the document feeder loop (i.e., looseness of document fed to the timing roller). Adjusts 3 feeding paths independently. - for less loop while + for more loop. (Setting unit: 1 mm) Proceed with this adjustment when you observe fluctuation of printing front defects, or skewing, bending, or misfeeding of print papers. Description First cassette Add-on cassette -5 mm to +5 mm -5 mm to +5 mm Default 0 0 0

Dup & manual feed -5 mm to +5 mm (2) ATDC sensor gain < Function/default > Adjusts the gain of the ATDC sensor. (Record the current value before changing it.) Current value : the present control voltage of ATDC. Setting value : the set control voltage of ATDC The gain setting is a stepwise adjustment. - for more T/C ratio to be detected while + for less T/C ratio. ATDC sensor gain = 5.1 2.2 [setting value] / 256 [V] Description 123 to 186

Default 155

8-22

(3) Edge erase adjustment < Function/default > Adjust the edge erase of the main and sub scanners for the engine. Can be adjusted leading/trailing/up-down (by 1 mm). (Up-down corresponds to right-left when you see the direction of the paper ejection vertically.) Perform this adjustment after replacing the printer head. It should be done after the printer adjustment (the adjustments of the main/sub scanner record starting positions.) Description Leading edge Trailing edge Up-down 0 to +5 mm 0 to +5 mm 0 to +5 mm Default 4 4 4

(4) ID adjustment < Function/default > Adjusts the contrast of printed images. Specifies the center value of print density of the copy setting. - for less contrast while + for more contrast of printed images. Description -2 to +4 Default 0

(5) VG adjustment < Function/default > Adjusts VG to match the characteristics of the photosensitive drum. Perform this adjustment when you observe voids or overlapping in images. It is a step-wise adjustment. - for more VG (less the absolute value) while + for less VG (more the absolute value.) Description -2 to +2 [2] Procedures (1) Touch [Printer] on the screen of the service choice. (See Section 8-3-4 Service choice.) Default 0

8-23

(2) Touch [Loop Adjustment] on the printer screen.

(3) Adjust Paper Feed Loop on the screen for paper feed loop. Clear the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. Change the signs + or - with the <ID> key or the < >key. (4) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen. (5) Touch [ATDC Set] on the printer screen.

(6) Adjust the ATDC sensor gain on the screen of the ATDC. Type an adjusted value with the 10-key pad and the <Clear> key. (7) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen. (8) Touch [Edge Erase] on the printer screen.

(9) Perform the adjustment on the screen for edge erase adjustment. Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. (10) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen. (11) Touch [Image Density] on the printer screen.

8-24

(12) Perform the ID adjustment on the screen for ID adjustment. Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. Change the signs + or - with the <ID> key or the < >key. (13) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen. (14) Touch [VG Adjust] on the printer screen.

(15) Perform the VG adjustment for screen of the VG adjustment. Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad. (16) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.

8-3-5. SYSTEM INPUT

[1] Features (1) Paper size input (2) Change fixed zoom (3) Machine configuration (4) Serial number (5) Permit Imaging Unit : Section 8-3-5 << 1 >> : Section 8-3-5 << 2 >> : Section 8-3-5 << 3 >> : Section 8-3-5 << 4 >> : Section 8-3-5 << 5 >>

[2] Procedures (1) Select [System Input] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Paper Size Input], [Machine Configuration], [Permit Imaging Unit], [Change Fixed Zoom], [Serial Number], or [Original Size Detecting Option] on the screen of the system input.

<< 1 >> Paper Size Input [1] Features Specify a paper size for a 500-sheet cassette.

8-25

[2] Procedures (1) Select [Paper Size Input] on the screen of the system input.

(2) Select the cassette that is a 500-sheet cassette on the screen of [Paper Size Input 1].

(3) Select one of paper sizes displayed on the screen of [Paper Size Input 2]. Alternatively, press <F> or <C> and enter numbers with the 10-key pad.

(4) Touch [END] to return to the [Paper Size Input 1] screen. (5) If you wish to set up another cassette, select that cassette and repeat the steps (3) and (4). (6) If you do not wish to set up another cassette, touch [END] to return to the screen of the system input. < Selectable range > Paper cassette 2nd to 5th paper cassette Printable paper size A3L, A4L, A4C, B4L, B5L, B5C 1117" L, 1114" L, Legal L, Letter L, Letter C, and FLS. L: Lengthwise, C: Crosswise Numerical range with 10-key pad: 0 - 999mm

Note A4L and 5.58.5" are not available; they will be displayed on screen but are not available.

< Default sizes > 2nd bin Letter C 3rd bin Letter C 4th bin Letter C 5th bin Letter C LCC Letter C

* These are valid for inserted cassettes. * Specify LCC with its internal dip switch. It cannot be change from the panel.

8-26

<< 2 >> Change Fixed Zoom [1] Features Changes a fixed zoom to a variable zoom. Displayed figures on keys remain the same. [2] Procedure (1) Select [Change Fixed Zoom] on the screen of the system input.

(2) Touch the fixed zoom to be changed, then the current value will be displayed. Clear it with <Clear> key and type a new value with the 10-key pad. (3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen. 0.250 to 4.000 (common to all zoom keys) < Zoom range > < Selectable range > Zoom out: LegalLetter, 1115Letter, 1117Letter, 0.5 Zoom in: Legal1117, Letter1117, 5 1/28 1/2Legal, 2.0 Fullsize << 3 >> Machine Configuration

[1] Features Displays the Machine configuration. [2] Procedure (1) Select [Machine Configuration] on the screen of the system input.

(2) Touch [Next].

8-27

How to confirm the add-on memory capacity: When you add a memory card, ROT (8MB or 16MB), the system indicates 8.3MB of the rotational memory. If you add a PKG-ASSY (ROT) with the rotational memory of 8.3 MB, the image memory capacity is increased by 8.0MB or 16MB and the system indicates 8 MB or 16MB, respectively. If you add a PKG-ASSY (TMEM), the image memory of 32 MB is added and the system indicates 32MB. (3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system input screen. << 4 >> Serial Number [1] Features Registers the factory serial number. [2] Procedure (1) Select [Serial Number] on the screen of the system input.

(2) Register the serial number on the new screen. (3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen. << 5 >> Permit Imaging unit [1] Features Enable an inserted I/C by mistake. Once it is enabled, it cannot be disabled again. [2] Procedure (1) Select [Permit Imaging Unit] on the screen of the system setup.

(2) Select [Yes] or [No] on the screen of the Imaging Unit. (3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen. << 6>> Original size detecting option Set whether the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor is available or not. (1) Select [Original Size Detecting Option] on the screen of the system setup. (2) Select [Yes] or [No] on the screen of the Imaging Unit. (3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen.\

8-28

8-3-6. COUNTER
< Features > Displays and changes values of various counters as reference data for checking up by technical service personnel. (See each section of counters for details.) Item Paper Jam Trouble PM Per Device Maintenance Description Accumulated numbers for each paper size and an special papers Number of occurrences of jamming Number of occurrences of trouble Number of usage of each element (parts for PM) Number of prints for each application Specifies the number of pages until the indication of requiring maintenance, or displays the number of accumulated copies

Can reset the value of each counter. How to reset: (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] in the service mode. (3) Touch [Counter Reset]. (4) Select a counter to be reset. (5) Touch [END].

<< 1 >> Paper Counter [1] Features (1) Displays the accumulated number for each size and type of print paper. (2) Can reset each counter independently. (3) Will not count the unprinted paper passed while the system is in the service mode. List of paper counters Item A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 1117" 1114" Letter Description Number of A3L papers used Number of B4L papers used Number of A4L, C papers used Number of B5L, C papers used Number of A5L, C papers used Number of B6L papers used Number of A6L papers used Number of 1117L papers used Number of 1114 papers used Number of Letter L, C papers used

8-29

Item Legal 5-1/28-1/2" FLS Normal Recycled Special Not for 2 sided

Description Number of Legal L, C papers used Number of 5.58.5L, C papers used Number of FLS papers used Number of standard papers used Number of recycled paper used Number of special papers used Number of single-side only papers used

[2] Procedures (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [Paper].

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End]. (6) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter. If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored.

8-30

<< 2 >> Jam Counter [1] Features (1) Displays the number of occurrences of misfeed and its rate of occurrences (MCBJ and MDBJ). (2) Can reset each counter separately. List of Jam counters Item MCBJ system Description Average number of papers between paper misfeed incidents Total counter/misfeed counter for MCBJ (including misfeed in finisher) Average number of papers between paper misfeed incidents Total counter/misfeed counter for MCBJ (including misfeed in finisher) Number of occurrences of misfeed in the 1st drawer of the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 2nd drawer in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 3rd drawer in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 4th drawer in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 5th drawer in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the manual feed in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the vertical transfer section in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed of the separator in the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed in the fuser of the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed in the reversed 2 sided paper holding section of the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed in 2 sided paper feeder of the main machine Number of occurrences of misfeed in the LCC feeder Number of occurrences of misfeed in the LCC transfer section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the Shift/Job tray transfer section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the Shift/Job tray ejector Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher horizontal transfer section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher ejection section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher exit section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher staple

MCBJ Machine Only 1st Drawer 2nd Drawer 3rd Drawer 4th Drawer 5th Drawer Manual feed Vertical transport Separator Fusing 2 sided Entrance 2 sided Feed LCC feed LCC transport Shift/Job Tray Transport Shift/Job Tray Exit Finisher Horizontal Transport Finisher Transport Finisher Exit Finisher staple

8-31

Item Finisher set Transport MDBJ 2 side ADF Print Paper feeding 2 side ADF Transport 2 side ADF Reverse 2 side ADF single feed Print Engine

Description Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher process tray Average number of papers between document misfeed incidents ADF printout paper counter/ ADF misfeed counter Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR (ADF) feeder Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR (ADF) paper reverse section Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR ejector Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR single feeder Number of occurrences of misfeed due to faulty specification to PC print Number of occurrences of misfeed in communication error (VD error) with the engine

[2] Procedures (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [Jam].

(4) Touch [Next].

8-32

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Touch [Next].

(7) Touch [Next].

(8) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End]. (9) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter. If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored. << 3 >> PM Counter [1] Features (1) Displays the usage counters in the table shown below. (2) Can reset each counter separately. (3) Can reset each counter class separately using clear counter selection. (Cannot reset I/C life counter.) List of PM counters Item I/C Life Fusing Unit 1st Drawer (multi-purpose) 2nd Drawer 3rd Drawer Description Number of rotations of I/C Number of ejected papers Number of fed papers from the 1st drawer of the main machine. Number of fed papers from the 2nd drawer of the main machine. Number of fed papers from the 3rd drawer of the main machine.

8-33

Item 4th Drawer 5th Drawer LCC Parts 1 LCC Parts 2 Other PM Parts 1 Other PM Parts 2 Other PM Part 3 2 Sided ADF 1 Sided 2 Sided ADF 2 Sided 2-Sided ADF SingleFeed Scanner Clean 1 Scanner Clean 2 Job Tray Toner Pages * Drawer = Cassette

Description Number of fed papers from the 4th drawer of the main machine. Number of fed papers from the 5th drawer of the main machine. Number of printed papers from LCC (for 200K) Number of printed papers from LCC (for 300K) Number of copied papers (for 100K) Number of copied papers (for 150K) Number of copied papers (for 60K/120K) Number of feed 1 sided papers (ADFR) Number of feed 2 sided papers (ADFR) Number of printed 2-sided single-feed papers (ADFR) Number of scans of the scanner (for 60K) Number of scans of the scanner (for 120K) Number of ejected papers from the 2 bin tray Displays the number of sheets converted into the number of black dots in an A4 size paper with 5% black dotted document

[2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [PM].

8-34

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Select a counter to be reset. (The I/C life counter cannot be cleared.) If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End]. (7) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter. If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored. << 4 >>Trouble Counter [1] Features (1) Displays the number troubles occurred. Can reset each counter separately. List of counters Item C0000 10 45 4C 4E 70 C0500 10 20 C0650 51 C0990 91 95 99 Main Motor I/C Motor Cooling Fan Ventilation Fan Cooling Fun (Power supply) Toner Bottle Motor Fusing Warming-up Fuser Low Temperature Fuser High Temperature Home Sensor Left Sensor LCC Transport Motor LCC Lift 1 Limit LCC Lift Motor LCC Lift 2 Limit Description

8-35

Item 9D C0B00 0F 30 38 4D 4E 50 80 A0 C0F32 33 C1038 39 C1300 30 3A 3B C0 D0 F0 C18XX LCC Communication

Description Finisher Transport Drive Motor Finisher Horiz. Trans. Route Switch Finisher Paper Aligning Bar Unit Finisher Paper Standard Board Unit Finisher Assist Tray Unit Finisher Transaction Tray Unit Finisher Staple Unit Finisher Shift Tray Shift Finisher Elevate Motor ATDC Sensor ATDC Adjust Engine Connection Scanner Connection Polygon Motor Communication Error (VSYNC) Communication Error (G/A) Communication Error (Option) I/C Initial Error EEPROM HSYNC (SOS) Printer Controller Error

[2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [Trouble].

8-36

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Touch [Next].

(7) Touch [Next].

(8) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End]. (9) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter. If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored. << 5 >> Device Counter [1] Features (1) Displays the number of printouts from each application.

8-37

(2) Can reset each counter separately. List of counters Item Copier Printer Report print Fax print Fax transmission Number of copies Number of PC printouts Number of report printouts Number of fax printouts Number of transmitted fax sheets Description

[2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [Device].

(4) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End]. (5) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter. If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored. << 6 >> Maintenance Counter [1] Features (1) Can specify the number of printouts until the next maintenance notice. (1k to 9999k). (2) Displays the value of the counter and the specified number by item (1). (3) Can reset each counter separately. (4) A maintenance call mark ( ) on the status line at the bottom of the LCD screen will be displayed once the counter reaches the specified value.

8-38

 List of counters Item Maintenance (set) Maintenance (counted) Description Displays a maintenance call once the counter reaches this value. Counts each printout

[2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [Maintenance].

(4) If you need to change the specified value, select the maintenance counter (specified) and then go to step (5). If you do not wish to change or reset this counter, touch [End] and then go to step (6). (5) < Change the specified value > Press <Clear> to reset the specified value and type a new number. Press <Interrupt> right after <Clear> to restore the previous value. (6) < Clear the counted number > Press <Clear> to reset the counted number. Press <Interrupt> right after <Clear> to restore the previous value.

8-3-7. FUNCTION
< Description > Adjust/confirm several system operations in this mode. Item F-1 F-2 F-8 F-12 Description Paper feed test without printing Specifies output values for each HV (factory setting) Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor Prints pre-determined test patterns

8-39

<< 1 >> [F1] - Paper feed test without printing [1] Features (1) Conduct a paper feed test from the specified paper feeder. Will not print with this test. (2) Can specify 2 sided paper. In this case, a paper feed test is conducted through the 2 sided copy path. [2] Procedures (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [F1].

(4) Select a paper feed slot to be tested. For a 2 sided copy test, touch [2 sided]. (5) Press <Start> then the test will be started and the LED turns orange. (6) Press <Stop> then the test will be stopped and the LED turns green. (Tests will be stopped when the feeder has no paper.) << 2 >> [F2] - Specification of output values for each HV [1] Features (1) Specifies the output value for each HV.

Note This is a factory setting. Do not use this feature.

[2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service mode.

8-40

(3) Touch [F2].

(4) (5) (6) (7)

Select an item to be tested. Press <Start> then the operation will be started and the LED turns orange. Adjust the value with the potentiometer for the specified voltage or current. Press <Stop> then the operation will be stopped and the LED turns green. (The operation will be stopped automatically after 15 seconds once it is started.)

<< 3 >> [F8] - Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor [1] Features (1) Adjusts the ATDC sensor automatically. (The adjusted voltage will be displayed on the ATDC sensor gain of the element data.) (2) This adjustment will be carried out automatically when a new I/C is installed. [2] Procedure (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [F8].

(4) Press <Start> then the adjustment will be started and the start LED turns orange. (5) Press <Stop> then the operation will be stopped and the start LED turns green.

8-41

<< 4 >> [F12] - Printing pre-determined test patterns [1] Features (1) Prints test patterns. (2) Prints test patterns from specified paper feeder. Can use 2 sided paper. With 2 sided papers, test patterns are printed on both sides. [2] Procedures (1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service mode.

(3) Touch [F12].

(4) Select a paper feeder. Press <2 sided> for 2 sided printing. (5) Press <Start> then the printing will be started and the start LED turns orange. (6) Press <Stop> then the printing will be stopped and the start LED turns green. (Tests will be stopped if the feeder is out of paper.)

8-3-8. I/O CHECK

[1] Features < Overview > Displays statuses of sensors and switches. Indicates 0 or 1 for sensors. Alternatively analog values (0 to FFFF) are displayed. Sensor Check Scan-throygh ADF Book-scan 2 Sided ADF Output Option Printer Description Displays the status of ADF sensors. Displays the status of Book scanner sensors. Displays the status of ADFR sensors. Displays the status of paper ejection option sensors (Shift tray, Job tray, Finisher, Mail-bin Finisher). Displays the status of the printer (engine).

8-42

(1) Printer sensors < Features > Displays the status of the sensors and switches of the printer (engine). Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches. Analog values are decimal numbers. Item Drawer 1 (MP tray) Sensor Drawer Set Double feed Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Size Detection Drawer 2 Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Side Cover Drawer Detect Drawer 3 Take up Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Side Cover Drawer Detect Drawer 4 Take up Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Side Cover Drawer Detect Drawer 5 Take up Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Side Cover Drawer Detect 2 sided/ manual feed 2 sided set 2 sided paper 2 sided cover Paper Take up Bypass Set Cassette sensor Paper stuck sensor Paper near empty sensor Paper empty sensor Paper size detection sensor(analog value) Paper near empty sensor Paper empty sensor Feeder cover sensor Set/type sensor Paper feed sensor Paper near empty sensor Paper empty sensor Feeder cover sensor Set/type sensor Paper feed sensor Paper near empty sensor Paper empty sensor Feeder cover sensor Set/type sensor Paper feed sensor Paper near empty sensor Paper empty sensor Feeder cover sensor Set/type sensor 2 sided paper sensor 2 sided cover sensor Manual feed sensor Manual feed detection sensor (2 bit) 2 sided paper feed detection sensor (2 bit) (2 bit) (2 bit) Description

8-43

Item LCC

Sensor Lifter level S1 Lifter level S2 Registration S1S PPS0S PPS1S Paper Near Empty 1 Paper Near Empty 2 Paper Size Paper Empty

Description Lifter level sensor 1 Lifter level sensor 2 Regist sensor S1 sensor PPS0 sensor Paper near empty sensor 1 Paper near empty sensor 2 Paper size sensor Paper empty sensor Fuser thermistor (analog value) I/C type signal (analog value) Toner empty sensor (analog value) Drum thermistor (analog value) LCC side cover sensor LCC front cover sensor Main product side cover sensor Toner bottle cover sensor Sub hopper empty sensor Toner bottle home position sensor Timing roller front sensor Paper ejection sensor Internal fan lock signal Main motor lock signal I/U motor lock signal Polygon motor lock signal Ozone fan lock signal

Fuser I/C

Fuser thermistor I/C Discrimination Toner Empty Drum Thermistor

Door/toner

LCC Side Cover LCC Front Cover Side Cover Toner Bottle Cover Sub Hopper Toner Bottle Set

Paper transfer Timing Roller Exit Driver detection Cooling Fan Main Motor I/U Motor Polygon Motor Ventilation Fan * Drawer = Cassette

8-44

(2) ADFR sensors < Features > Displays statuses of ADFR sensors. Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches. Item 2 side ADF (ADFR) Empty Registration Exit Section Dup. Single feed empty Sizes (Back) Sizes (Center) Sizes (Front) Pick up Sensor Empty sensor Regist sensor Paper ejection sensor Reverse sensor Single feed empty sensor Width sensor 1 (Back) Width sensor 2 (Center) Width sensor 1 (Front) Pick up sensor Description

(3) Paper ejection option sensor < Features > Displays status of the sensors and switches of paper ejection options (shift tray, 2-bin tray, finisher, mail-bin finisher). Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches. Analog values are displayed in decimal numbers. Paper ejection option Shift tray

Item Empty Tray full

Sensor Empty

Description

Bin full sensor Shift home position sensor Paper ejection sensor Cover sensor Upper tray empty sensor Upper tray full sensor Lower tray full sensor Upper tray paper ejection sensor Cover sensor

Shift Home Exit Cover Job tray Raised Tray Empty Raised Tray Full Lowered Tray Full Raised Tray Exit Cover

8-45

Paper ejection option Finisher

Item Horizontal Transport

Sensor Paper Passage Tray Empty Horizontal Position Non-Sort Position

Description Paper pass sensor of horizontal transfer path Empty sensor of horizontal transfer tray Horizontal sensor of horizontal transfer Non-sort position sensor of horizontal transfer Ejection sensor of first tray Full detection sensor of first tray Empty sensor of first tray Elevate tray upper limit sensor Elevate tray lower limit sensor Elevate tray empty sensor Process tray ejection sensor Process tray fixed position sensor Matching rod position S Matching reference plate position S

Top Tray

Exit Full Detect Empty

Elevate Tray Raised Lowered Empty Finisher Transaction Tray Exit Home Paper Aligning Bar Home Paper standard Board Home Assist Tray Home Stapler Paper detect Home Staple Empty Self priming Mail-bin Finisher Exit Empty 1st mail-bin 2nd mail-bin 3rd mail-bin 4th mail-bin 5th mail-bin Full detection 1st mail-bin 2nd mail-bin 3rd mail-bin 4th mail-bin 5th mail-bin

Assist Tray Exit Position Sub tray idle position sensor Sub tray fixed position S Paper to be stapled detection sensor Stapler home sensor Staple empty sensor Self priming sensor Mail-bin ejection sensor 1st mail-bin empty sensor 2nd mail-bin empty sensor 3rd mail-bin empty sensor 4th mail-bin empty sensor 5th mail-bin empty sensor 1st mail-bin full sensor 2nd mail-bin full sensor 3rd mail-bin full sensor 4th mail-bin full sensor 5th mail-bin full sensor

8-46

(4) Scan-through ADF sensors < Features > Displays statuses of ADF sensors. Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches. Sensors are S1 to S9. (5) Book Scan sensors < Features > Displays statuses of Book scan sensors. Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches. Sensors are carriage (L), carriage (HP), cover open sensor, and 15 sensor. [2] Procedure < 1 > ADF (1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Scan-through ADF] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Confirm ADF sensors.

(4) Touch [Enter] to return to the sensor check screen. < 2 > Book scanner (1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

8-47

(2) Select [Book-scan] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Confirm book scanner sensors.

(4) Touch [Enter] to return to the sensor check screen. < 3 > ADFR (1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [2 Sided ADF] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check ADF sensors.

(4) Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

8-48

< 4 > Paper ejection option (1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Output Option] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check a paper ejection sensor.

(4) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor. Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

(5) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor. Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

(6) Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

8-49

< 5 > Printer (1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Printer] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check a printer sensor.

(4) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor. Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

(5) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor. Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

8-50

(6) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor. Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

(7) Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.

8-3-9. MOVEMENT CHECK

[1] Features < Function > Operates a specified section of the system for checking. Item ADFR paper feed check BS scanner arbitrary shift CCD driving Lamp check Lamp intensity Description Checks paper out of ADFR Shifts the carriage of the Book scanner according to the specified value Drives CCD Turn on the cold cathode lamp Check the intensity of the cold cathode lamp

[2] Procedure < ADFR paper feed check > (1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Paper Feed Check] on the screen of the movement check.

Load documents on the document tray and select one of the following items on screen: [1-sides No Detect] . . to read one side of documents with the same size. [1- sided Mixed Orig] [2- sided] [SADF]

8-51

< BS scanner arbitrary shift > < CCD driving > and < Lamp check > (1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Scanner] on the screen of the movement check.

Select one of the following items on screen: CCD driving: [Drive] . . . . . . to drive CCD Lamp [On] . . . . . . . . . . . . . to turn on the Xe lamp BS carriage arbitrary shift . enter the position (relative or absolute positions) of the carriage to shift it arbitrarily Absolute position :a distance (line) from the carriage home position (HP) Relative position : a distance (line) from the current position of the carriage (10mm = 236 lines) Number of lines to be entered: (a) For transferring or packing the system (removal or replacement): 566 lines (the absolute position) (b) For dismounting and reattaching the Xe lamp: 7505 lines (the absolute position) (c) For replacing the inverter: 0 line (the absolute position) (d) For dismounting and reattaching the slider: 7505 lines (the absolute position) (e) For installing the Book scanner document detection sensor (an inch option) : 10927 lines (the absolute position) < Lamp intensity > (1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the service mode.

8-52

(2) Select [Exp. Lamp Check] on the screen of the movement check.

Check the intensity of the lamp to adjust its gain.

8-53

8-3-10. ROM VERSION

[1] Features You can check versions of the following ROMs. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) MAIN Printer 2 Sided ADF LCC Printout option

[2] Procedures (1) Select [ROM Version] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) The versions of ROMs ([MAIN], [Printer], [2 Sided ADF], [LCC] and [Printout opt]) are displayed on screen.

8-3-11. LEVEL HISTORY

[1] Features < Function > Displays data on image stabilization of the system. Item ATDC sensor gain Description Displays the gain of ATDC sensor * Displays the voltage adjusted by the ATDC sensor automatic adjustment [F8] Displays the grid voltage Displays the bias voltage Display 123 to 186 by 1 step Unit -

ATDC sensor output Displays the output of the ATDC sensor 3.0 to 19.0 by 0.5 % Vg output value Vb output value -534 to -748 (Di350f) -514 to -728 (Di250f) -409 to -603

% V V

8-54

[2] Procedure (1) Select [Level History] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Data on < ATDC Set >, < ATDC Current >, < Vg Current >, and < Vb Current > are displayed on screen.

8-3-12. FAX SETTING

<< 1 >> Setting the service call [1] Features When the pre-set condition of the system occurs, the system informs its status to the call center automatically. There are 2 methods of data transmission: report transmission by fax and data transmission by data communication. Understand the operation of the call center to set this feature properly. (1) Specify the maintenance date (2) Enter the call number (3) Specify the transmission condition (4) Specify the transmission method (5) Enter the fax destination number [2] Procedure < 1 > Maintenance date (1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

8-55

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

(3) Select [Maintenance Date] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Select [Year], [Month], and [Day] on the screen of the maintenance date to specify the date for maintenance.

< 2 > Call number (1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

8-56

(3) Select [Call Number] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Enter [TEL#] on the screen of the call number to specify the phone number.

(5) Select [Com. Mode] on the screen of the call number to specify the communication mode.

< 3 > Transmission condition (1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

8-57

(3) Select [TX Condition] of the service call set.

(4) Set [No. of print], [Toner empty], and [Drum life] ([ON] or [OFF]) on the screen of the transmission condition and touch [Enter].

(5) If you touch [ON] in the step (4), the screen will be for presetting the number of prints. Specify [Preset # of Print] on this screen and touch [Enter].

< 4 > Transmission method (1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

8-58

(3) Select [Transmission Method] of the service call set.

(4) Select [Report] or [Data] on the screen of the transmission method and touch [Enter].

* Select [Report] for fax transmission and [Data] for data communication. < 5 > Fax destination Enters the fax number on a report when a notification to the call center fails. Example:

*** NOTICE *** (THU) JUN 17 1999 16:35 Imaging Unit (I/U) is almost running out. Would you please replace the old I/U with a new one. If you don't have any in stock, please send this sheet via fax to the following address; Fax to : (xxx) xxx-xxxx Serial # : xxxxxxxxxx Our sales representaive will call you as soon as possible. Thank you in advance.

8-59

(1) Select [FAX Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

(3) Select [FAX destination] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Enter the fax number on the screen of the fax destination.

<< 2 >> Terminal transmission [1] Features You can receive data on the one touch dial or send the data stored in the system to the call center. When the service call is in the data transmission mode, the same call number will be used to make a terminal transmission to the call center. If the service call is in the fax transmission mode, you need to switch it to the data transmission mode and also change the call number. Always restore the service call setup after you complete a terminal transmission.

8-60

[2] Procedure (1) Select [FAX Setting] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Terminal TX] on the screen of the fax setting.

(3) Enter [Function ID Code] and [Extended ID Code] on the screen of the terminal transmission and touch [Execute].

Note Enter the destination number in <Call number> of <Service call setting> and set <Transmission method> in <Service call setting> to be Report.
(4) Start remote diagnostics on the screen of the remote diagnostics.

8-61

8-3-13. ADJUSTMENT FEATURES

[1] Overview The adjustment features will be used to do fine adjustments of the scanner and the printer. Follow the procedures described below to carry out checkups and adjustments. Flow chart of the adjustment overview

Start

Check and adjust the cassette record section

Adjust printer registration (cassette) Zoom adjustment Adjustment of Reading position Adjustment of document detection

Check and adjust the document reading section

Check and adjust document detection

First, check and adjust the printing section and then go to the document reading section. << 1 >> Printer Adjustment [1] Features Adjusts and prints the starting position of printing by setting the main scanner reference position and the sub scanner reference position. Proceed with this adjustment when an add-on cassette is installed or the printer head is replaced.
Set the main scanner reference position (set value = 0 mm). - (Minus) + (plus) - (Minus) Setting the sub scanner reference position (set value = 0 line). Printing direction + (plus)

Set range: Main scanner Sub scanner (Di350f) (Di250f)

: -4 mm to + 4 mm by 0.1 mm step : -6.08 mm (-19 units) to +6.08 mm (+19 units). by 0.32 mm step : -5.98 mm (-26 units) to +5.98 mm (+26 units). by 0.23 mm step

8-62

Restrictions: Without setting options, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 2 sided settings are invalid. There is one setting for the sub scanner per fax system. [2] How to check (1) Checking cassettes Print an Activity Report (TX) from each installed cassette to check the recording positions. Print the Activity Report (TX) to Letter size paper (Lengthwise). (2) Checking 2 sided paper Complete the adjustment of paper feeding from cassette (the registration adjustment) and of the reading section of the Book scanner. Then check the 2 sided paper. a. b. c. d. Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter size paper (Lengthwise). Make a single2 sided copy using a blank paper as the document. Make a single2 sided copy with the Book scanner using the Activity Report (TX) printed in (a). Overlap the document and its copy to check their mismatch. Refer to Method of overlapping a document and its copy (position correction) for this step. Proceed to the adjustment to minimize mismatch.

e.

8-63

[3] Detailed Flow Chart of Adjustment (1) 1 sided printing

Start Print an Activity Report (TX) from 1st cassette Yes No Carry out the sub scanner adjustment No Yes Yes No Carry out 1st main scanner adjustment No Yes No Yes Yes No Carry out 2nd main scanner adjustment No Yes No Yes Yes No Carry out 3rd main scanner adjustment No Yes No Yes Print an Activity Report (TX) from 4th cassette Yes No Carry out 4th main scanner adjustment No Yes No Yes Print an Activity Report (TX) from 5th cassette Yes No Carry out 5th main scanner adjustment No Yes End Check 5th main scanner OK? 5th main scanner OK? 5th cassette installed? Check 4th main scanner OK? 4th main scanner OK? 4th cassette installed? Check 3rd main scanner OK? 3rd cassette installed? Print an Activity Report (TX) from 3rd cassette 3rd main scanner OK? Check 2nd main scanner OK? 2nd cassette installed? Print an Activity Report (TX) from 2nd cassette 2nd main scanner OK? Check 1st main scanner OK? Check sub scanner OK? 1st main scanner OK? Sub scanner OK?

8-64

(2) 2 sided printing

Start Carry out adjustments for 1 sided printing

No Yes

1 sided printing OK?

Carry out Book scanner adjustments

No Yes

Check Book scanner OK?

Carry out adjustments for 2 sided printing

No Yes END

Check 2 sided printing OK?

[4] Procedures (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on Letter size paper (Lengthwise).

Note Print the report from a drawer whose registration is to be adjusted.

(2) Measure the size of the frame of the Activity Report (TX) (lengths a and b in the figure shown below). (The standard values are a=10mm and b=18.6mm. Adjust the size to obtain these numbers as close as possible.)

Note The value b for the sub scanner will be changed with the value of the [Service mode][Printer]-[Edge Erase]-[Leading edge]. The standard value b=18.6 mm corresponds to the leading edge=4 mm

Sub scanner b

Main scanner a Printing direction on ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) Letter paper

8-65

(3) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (4) Touch [Service Mode] after pressing <Utility>.

(5) Touch [Adjust].

(6) Touch [Printer].

(7) Select Registration (FD) and touch [END].

Note No need to specify it for each cassette. Adjust it for one cassette only.

(8) Type an adjusted value with the 10-key pad or the touch key and touch [END].

Note Can change the sign of + or - with the <ID> key or the key.

8-66

(9) Select Registration (CD) and touch [END].

(10) Specify a cassette whose registration is to be adjusted. Type the adjusted value with the 10key or the touch key.

Note Change the sign of + or - with the <ID> key or the key.

(11) Touch [END]. << 2 >> Scanner Adjustment [1] Features < 1 > Scanner zoom adjustment Can adjust the zoom values of the main and the sub scanners for ADF and BS independently. Minus: zoom out Plus : zoom in Adjustable range: ADF main scanner ADF sub scanner BS main scanner BS sub scanner

-1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1% -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1% -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1% -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1%

< 2 > Scanner registration adjustment Can adjust the start position of the main and sub scanners for ADF and BS independently.
Adjusting reference position for main scanner (adjusted value 0 dot) - (minus) (Document leading edge) Scanning direction - (minus) Adjusting reference position for sub scanner (adjusted value 0 line) + (plus) (Document trailing edge) + (plus)

8-67

Adjustable range ADF main scanner BS main scanner ADF sub scanner BS sub scanner

-72 dots to +72 dots by 1 dot -72 dots to +72 dots by 1 dot (1mm = 24 dots) -127 lines to +127 lines by 1 line -24 lines to +127 lines by 1 line (1mm = 24 line)

Note First proceed to the zoom adjustments and then go to the scanning position adjustments.
[2] Copy Book Zoom Ratio Adjustment < 1 > How to check Measure the difference of the zoom ratios between a document and its copy. Type this measured value for this adjustment. We describe an example using an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List. (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) For the main scanner, measure the length of the horizontal line c of the Activity Report (TX) with a ruler. For the sub scanner, measure the length of the vertical line d of the Setting List with a ruler.
ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) SETTING LIST

The length to be measured as c

SELF ABBR.# ADMINISTRATOR MANAGEMENT INITIAL SETTING ID SELF ID :

PRINT PAPER

ROTATE PRINT :

Reference value c=188 mm

Reference value d=185.2 mm

(3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner. (4) Repeat the step (2) for the copies obtained in the step (3). (5) Calculate the zoom ratios. Zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)) (6) Reference values for the zoom ratios Main scanner : 100% 1.0% Sub scanner : 100% 1.0% If the zoom ratio is different from its reference value, adjust it following the flow chart of the adjustment. Try to obtain the closest value to [100% - the zoom ratio calculated in the step (5)].

8-68

The length to be measured as d

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with Book scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Check Book zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?

[3] Copy ADF Zoom Ratio Adjustment < 1 > How to check Measure the difference in the zoom ratios between a document and its copy. Type this measured value for this adjustment. We describe an example using an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List. (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) For the main scanner, measure the length of the horizontal line c of the Activity Report (TX) with a ruler. For the sub scanner, measure the length of the vertical line d of the Setting List with a ruler. (Similar to step (2) of [2] Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment) (3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner. (4) Repeat the step (2) for the copies obtained in the step (3). (5) Calculate the zoom ratios. Zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)) (6) Reference values for zoom ratios Main scanner : 100% 1.0% Sub scanner : 100% 1.0% If the zoom ratio is different from its reference value, adjust it following the flow chart of the adjustment. Try to obtain the closest value to [100% - the zoom ratio calculated in the step (5)].

8-69

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with ADF scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Check zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK?

[4] Fax Book Zoom Ratio Adjustment < 1 > How to check (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) Measure the zoom ratios of the Activity Report (TX) and the Setting List obtained in the step (1). (Similar to [2] Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the reference values of c=188 mm and d=185.2 mm). (3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner. (4) Measure the zoom ratios of these copies. (Similar to [2] Print Book zoom ratio adjustment, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the measured values in the step (2)). (5) Calculate the zoom ratios. First, calculate the zoom ratios for the copies: Copy zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)). Next, calculate the zoom ratios for the printouts: Printout zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (2)) / (Reference value in step (2)). The zoom ratio is given by Zoom ratio = (Copy zoom ratio / Printout zoom ratio). (6) Reference values for zoom ratios Main scanner : 100% 1.0% Sub scanner : 100% 1.0% If the zoom ratio is different from its reference value, adjust it following the flow chart of the adjustment. Try to obtain the closest value to [100% - the zoom ratio calculated in the step (5)].

8-70

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with Book scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Check zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?

[5] Fax ADF Zoom Ratio Adjustment < 1 > How to check (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) Measure the zoom ratios of the Activity Report (TX) and the Setting List obtained in the step (1). (Similar to [2] Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the reference values of c=188 mm and d=185.2 mm). (3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner. (4) Measure the zoom ratios of these copies. (Similar to [2] Print Book zoom ratio adjustment, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the measured values in the step (2)). (5) Calculate the zoom ratios. First, calculate the zoom ratios for the copies: Copy zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)). Next, calculate the zoom ratios for the printouts: Printout zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (2)) / (Reference value in step (2)). The zoom ratio is given by Zoom ratio = (Copy zoom ratio / Printout zoom ratio). (6) Target values for zoom ratios Main scanner : 100% 1.0% Sub scanner : 100% 1.0% If the zoom ratio is different from its reference value, adjust it following the flow chart of the adjustment. Try to obtain the closest value to [100% - the zoom ratio calculated in the step (5)].

8-71

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with ADF scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Check zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK?

[6] Book Scanning Position Adjustment < 1 > How to check (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) Make a copy of the printout obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner. (3) Overlap the copy with the document to check their mismatch. Refer How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment). (4) Target values for the mismatch Main scanner : 2.0mm Sub scanner : 1.5mm If the mismatch is different from its target value, adjust it following the flow chart shown below.

Note First adjust the printer (Section 8-3-13) and the zoom ratio of the scanner. Then carry out this adjustment.

8-72

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with Book scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of Book sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Check zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?

Note Adjust both Book scanner copy and Book scanner fax.
< 3 > How to adjust Refer How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment). [7] ADF Scanning Position Adjustment < 1 > How to check (1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter-size paper (Lengthwise). (2) Make a copy of the printout obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner. (3) Overlap the copy with the document to check their mismatch. Refer How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment). (4) Target values for the mismatch Main scanner : 2.0mm Sub scanner : 3.0mm If the mismatch is different from its target value, adjust it following the flow chart shown below.

Note First adjust the printer (Section 8-3-13) and the zoom ratio of the scanner. Then carry out this adjustment.

8-73

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

Start Copy with ADF scanner Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF main scanner No Yes Yes No Adjust zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner No Yes End Check zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Check zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK? Zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK?

Note Adjust both ADF scanner copy and ADF scanner fax.

8-74

How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment) We will describe the method of overlapping a document with its copy. (1) Overlapping document and its copy. Match the left upper corners of a document and its copy.

Document Match

Match

ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)

Copy

ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)

(2) Check lines for mismatches The left side (vertical line) of the title frame for the main scanner. The upper line (first line) of the title frame for the sub scanner.

ACTIVITY REPORT

Check line for main scanner mismatch Check line for sub scanner mismatch (TX)

[8] Procedures (1) Adjust the printer following Section 8-3-13. (2) Make a copy of an Activity Report (TX). (3) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (4) Touch [Service Mode] under <Utility>.

8-75

(5) Touch [Adjust].

(6) Touch [Scanner].

(7) Select an item to be adjusted from ADF-Copy, ADF-Fax, Book Scanner-Copy, or Book Scanner-Fax. Then touch [Enter]. Example: Touch [ADF-Copy] to display the screen for the adjustment of the ADF sub scanner.

(8) Select an item to be adjusted and type a new adjusted value with the 10-key pad or the touch key. Repeat this step for another item. Touch [Enter]. << 3 >> Document Size Detection [1] Overview Adjusts the document size detection sensors of Book scanner/ADFR automatically. [2] Procedures (1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.) (2) Touch [Service Mode] under <Utility>.

8-76

(3) Touch [Adjust].

(4) Touch [Scanner].

(5) Select an item to be adjusted from [Copy Detect Adj.] or [FAX Detect Adj.]. Then Touch [Enter]. Example: Touch [FAX Detect Adj.] to display the screen for the adjustment of the print document detection.

(6) Touch [Adjust].

(7) Load 5 sheets of A3 or 11x17" paper on the Book scanner. (8) Close the cover of the Book scanner and touch [Start Key].

(9) The adjustment of the document size detection is carried out automatically. Once the adjustment is completed (the start LED turne green), the following screen will be displayed automatically.

8-77

(10) Touch [Enter]. Repeat those steps for the copy document detection. Remove the reference papers from the Book scanner after completing both adjustments.

Note The values on this adjustment are active after turning the power switch OFF and then ON. Display Contents: None LED of <Start> key shows the products status Red: printing Green: standby to start Press <Start> key to start adjustment When finishing adjustment LED color turns to Green.

8-78

8-4. SOFT SWITCH LIST

8-4-1. SOFT SWITCHES DISCLOSED TO USERS
Utility
Printer (Refer to the PC printer instruction manual) 1 to 10 Bulletin board number F CODE Copy Programs Report 1 TX. Act. Report RX. Act. Report Bulletin Board User List User Name Report 2 One-touch List Abbr. # List FAX Program List Relay Group List Reg. Abbr. # One-touch Index FAX Program Relay Group Self-Abbr. # Bull. User Reg. Func. Priority Screen (FAX/Auto/Copy) Priority FAX Screen (One-touch/Abbr. #/ 10-Key Dialing/Index) Received Document (Print/Forwrd/ Print&Forwrd/Save to Box/Move) TX 1 Priority Quality (Standard/Fine/Super Fine/ Text+Photo/GSR/Super GSR) Priority Contrast (Lighter-Normal-Darker) TX 2 TX (Memory TX/Real Time) TSI (Inside doc/Outside doc) TX Marker (Bottom/Top and Bottom/OFF) (optional) Report TX Report (Output ON/If TX fail/Output OFF) Report with Image (ON/OFF) MODE 002 Bit 6,5 MODE 023 Bit 3 MODE 000 Bit 1 MODE 000 Bit 5,4 MODE 000 Bit 7,6 MODE 001 Bit 7-4 MODE 001 Bit 3-1 MODE 402 Bit 1-0 MODE 018 Bit 5,4 F CODE F CODE F CODE Password Remote Input Check (ON/OFF) MODE 027 Bit 2 User 2 User TSI Access Number User Number User 1 F CODE Password Title Remote Input Check (ON/OFF) Remote Output Check (ON/OFF)

8-79

Utility
Maint. Sound Vol. Panel Cleaning Time & Date Toner Replenisher Anti-dew Administ. Initial Setting ID Line Func. Manage Line Type (DP20pps/DP10pps/PB) PSTN/Ext Line Switch (Extension/PSTN) Priority Screen (FAX/Auto/Copy) Priority FAX Screen (One-touch/Abbr. #/ 10-Key Dialing/Index) Received Document (Print/Forwrd/ Print&Forwrd/Save to Box) User Management Mode (Limited/Open) Administrator Number Comm. Password (00 to 99) Incomplete TX hold (10 Minutes to 72 Hours: 1 Hour) TX Setting TX Set 1 TX Set 2 TX Set 3 TX (Memory TX/Real-Time) TSI (Inside doc/Outside doc) Password TX (ON/OFF) TX Marker (Bottom/Top and Bottom/OFF) MODE 000 Bit 1 MODE 000 Bit 5,4 MODE 000 Bit 2 MODE 000 Bit 7,6 Priority Quality (Standard/Fine/Super Fine/ Text+Photo/GSR/Super GSR) Priority Contrast (Lighter-Normal-Darker) MODE 004 Bit 3-0 TSI Self-ID Self-telephone # PSTN1 MODE 006 Bit 7-5 MODE 006 Bit 4 MODE 402 Bit 1-0 MODE 018 Bit 5,4 PSTN2 MODE 011 Bit 7-5 MODE 011 Bit 4 Year, Month, Date, Hours, Minutes Buzzer Sound Volume Alarm Sound Volume Monitor Sound Volume MODE 415 Bit 7-5 MODE 415 Bit 4-2 MODE 416 Bit 7-5

MODE 001 Bit 7-4 MODE 001 Bit 3-1

Relay-station Print (ON/OFF) Line Selection (Auto/Manual)

MODE 002 Bit 0 MODE 006 Bit 1

Continue to next page

8-80

Continued from previous page

RX Setting RX 1 RX 2 Paper LongDOC

Reception Mode (Auto/Manual) No. of RX Call Rings (1 to 9) Password Reception (ON/OFF) If no paper matching up to TX doc. size (Paper Priority/Cassette Priority) Print Paper Select (Standard/Width Priority/ Constant Width Mode) Unselectable Cassette 2-TO-1 RX (ON/OFF) Rotate Print (Sort ON/Sort OFF/RotationOFF) Long Document (Reduction/Cut Off) Reduction (60/65/80/85/90/95/100%) Cut off Length (0/8/12/14/18/20/24mm) MODE 004 Bit7-4 MODE 000 Bit2 MODE 008 Bit7 MODE 008 Bit 6-3 MODE 037 Bit 7-3 MODE 030 Bit 4 MODE 030 Bit 6,5 MODE 007 Bit 1 MODE 007 Bit 4-2 MODE 007 Bit 7-5 MODE 002 Bit 6,5 MODE 023 Bit 3 MODE 002 Bit 7 MODE 002 Bit 3 MODE 400 Bit 6 MODE 403 Bit 7 MODE 409 Bit 5 MODE 409 Bit 4-1 MODE 410 Bit 7,6,3-0 MODE 424 Bit 3 MODE 409 Bit 7,6 MODE 412 Bit 7-4 MODE 412 Bit 3 MODE 400 Bit 7 MODE 402 Bit 7-5 MODE 402 Bit 4,3 MODE 403 Bit 0 MODE 408 Bit 7-4

Report set

TX Report (Output ON/If TX fail/Output OFF) Report Screen (ON/OFF) Activity Report (Output ON/Output OFF) Memory Cleared Report (Output ON/ Output OFF)

Copy Setting Scan Print Sort Func.

Mixed Original Detection (ON/OFF) Auto Scale (ON/OFF) Density Priority (Auto/Manual) (Text/Photo/Text+Photo) Default Level (Lighter/Normal/Darker) "Small" Originals (ON/OFF) 4-TO-1 Copy Order
12 13 34 24

Output Priority (Non-Sort/Sort/Group) Intelligent Sorting (ON/OFF) Memory Recall (ON/OFF) Orig. Copy (1-Sided 2-Sided/ 2-Sided 2-Sided/1-Sided 1-Sided) Auto Paper/Auto Size (Auto Paper/Auto Size/Manual) Auto-reset (ON/OFF) Print Set Default Print Paper (Top cassette) Special Paper (Normal/Not for 2 Sided Recycled/Special) Print Exposure (-2 to 0 to 2) Output Tray (optional)

MODE 411 Bit 7,2-0 MODE 413 Bit 5,4,2-0

Continue to next page

8-81

Continued from previous page

User Reg. User 1 User Name Access Number User Number User 2 F CODE User TSI F CODE F CODE Password Remote Input Check (ON/OFF) Print Limit User Account User selection No. of print Pages of TX Doc. Max. Print Page (0 to 999, 999 pages) MODE 027 Bit 2

Total Page Counter Total Size Backside Total Backside Size User Total Page FAX Print Copy Print Report Print TX PC Print Rep. Print User Acc. Report User List Setting List Power Save Auto-reset (1 to 240 Minutes) Pre-heat (15 to 240 Minutes) Heater OFF (15 to 240 Minutes: 60 Minutes) LCD Back-light OFF (1 to 240 Minutes) Anti-dew MODE 404 Bit 7-0 MODE 405 Bit 7-0 MODE 406 Bit 7-0 MODE 407 Bit 7-0

8-82

8-4-2. LIST OF DEFAULTS

Note * in the remark indicates a mode that has items opened to users.

MODE Default 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 30 14 AB 33 16 20 32 B8 00 1A 00 32 C0 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 02 FE 81 7F DE 24 63 00 31 80 71 14 02 03 00

Remark TX Marker, TSI, Password, Memory TX FAX quality, Density Report Line monitor, Forward RX (PSTN1) # of ringers, Memory time # of redialings DP speed, PB switch, Estimated connection time (PSTN1) Print range Select print paper Communication mode (Undefined) DP speed, PBX switch, Estimated connection time (PSTN2) Screen: display illustration, #, Input default cassette size at Power source on Auto-mode screen Redialing interval (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Destination displaying screen (Undefined) Display report Display symbol rate FAX memory nearly full capacity Set margins for report image Display forward function button, No receiving by other users Various service calls Service call, Remote maintenance Display ID, Secured comm., F code Remote print protocol, # of remote multi-copies (Undefined) Rotate print, 2-to-1, print paper selection restriction Margins for multi-sheet report image margin, Margins for output format of report image Detect short doc. jamming, FAX photo/txt mixed mode Draft printing mode and level Cut print paper leading edge, Overlapped printing RX by memory (Undefined) * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

8-83

MODE Default 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 F8 00 00 FA 40 3F 80 A0 00 00 88 C6 OD 0D 20 00 00 0A 0C 00 00 00 00 00 7F 00 00 A8 03 03 03 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Select FAX +paper cassette

Remark *

Turn on print lamp for out-of print paper (Undefined) 2-dim coding, T.6 coding, JBIG, V34JBIG ECM Redialing interval # of resending doc., Redialing non-answered call RTN sending error, TCF sending, T1 timer, T4 timer (Undefined) (Undefined) V34 fallback tolerance Set up MODEM standard Transmission speed upper limit (TX) Transmission speed upper limit (RX) Declare RX print paper size Relay Transmission (restricted/unrestricted) (Undefined) History control of V.34 auto dialing, Demodulation method ANSam sending (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

8-84

MODE 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

Default 00 00 00 28 22 54 80 40 90 40 00 00 00 70 48 0C 20 14 14 46 88 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 22 54 80 40 90 40 00 00 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN1) DP steady current time (PSTN1) DP make rate, PB sending level, PB detection method (PSTN1) TX level (PSTN1) RX attenuator (PSTN1) Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN1) Process detection time out of second ringing sound (PSTN1) Sending method, Prefix # (PSTN1) (Undefined) (Undefined) Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN1) CED, Receive command echo AGC lock (PSTN1) Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN1) CI signal sending time (PSTN1) TCF/NTCF sending level down, V.34 symbol rate (PSTN1) Initial time of sending CM signal, EQM threshold value (PSTN1) Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN1) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN2) DP steady current time (PSTN2) DP make rate, PB sending level, PB detection method (PSTN2) TX level (PSTN2) RX attenuator (PSTN2) Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN2) Process detection time out of second ringing sound (PSTN2) Sending method, Prefix # (PSTN2) (Undefined) * *

8-85

MODE 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162

Default 00 70 48 0C 20 14 14 46 88 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 07 07 01 07 00 10 07 20 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (Undefined)

Remark

Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN2) CED, Receive command echo AGC lock (PSTN2) Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN2) CI signal sending time (PSTN2) TCF/NTCF sending level down, V.34 symbol rate (PSTN2) Initial time of sending CM signal, EQM threshold value (PSTN2) Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN2) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

8-86

MODE 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204

Default 00 00 80 40 00 40 00 00 00 70 48 0C 20 14 14 46 88 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C0 33 31 30 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Restrict SF/SSF comm. (Undefined) Order of displaying year to date (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

8-87

MODE 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246

Default 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

8-88

MODE 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288

Default 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C1 85 B4 90 FF FF FF FF FF FF C1 85 D4 90 FF FF FF FF FF FF C1 85 D4 90 FF FF FF FF FF (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

8-89

MODE 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330

Default FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) REV soft switch for maintenance REV soft switch for maintenance REV soft switch for maintenance REV soft switch for maintenance REV soft switch for maintenance REV soft switch for maintenance (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

8-90

MODE 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372

Default 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

8-91

MODE 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413

Default 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 22 01 06 0F 00 01 00 08 44 00 08 04 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

Remark

Copy, Set up memory recall, Priority doc. mixed mode (Undefined)

Copy, Priority doc. mode, Priority copy mode, Automatic function priority mode, Priority application * Copy, Draft print zoom ratio, Auto-reset by user Auto-reset time Pre-heat time Auto-Power source off time Panel off time Copy, Default feeder (print paper) Copy, Default 4-to-1 print order, Exposure level, Doc. Level Copy, AE density level, Priority manual density level Copy, Sign bit, Adjust print density Copy, Auto-sort mode, Auto-punch mode, sort/nonsort Specify output bin * * * * * *

8-92

MODE 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429

Default 70 6C 60 63 00 00 00 20 08 48 00 00 00 00 00 00 Reserve memory copy Set sound vol. (buzzer & alarm)

Remark

* *

Set sound vol. (monitor), No auto-Power source off Set max # of copies (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Total counter, Size counter, Copy kit counter Copy, Key counter, Vendor mode, Doc. size OP Copy, Metrics/inch mix, Copy mode, Small doc. Copy, Adjust quality mode (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

8-93

8-4-3. LIST OF SOFT SWITCHES

The tables below describe the soft switches of this system. 6 mark shows a default value.

Note The features with (*) are settable by users. The feature with [**] (bit 1) is available only in a system with a multi-port option.

MODE 000 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 30) Feature Logic 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 Leading & trailing edges of doc. 1 Only trailing edge of doc. 0 No 1 6 Yes Meaning Description

Specifies whether TX marker is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. * Select position of TX marker. *

Specifies whether printing TSI on transmitted document is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. * Select position of TSI. *

4 3

0 Outside doc. 1 6 Inside doc. 0 6 No 1 Yes

Specifies whether confirming group password at TX is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. * Confirm group password at RX. * Specifies which TX method is returned to ON, memorystored TX or nonstorage TX after completing operations. *

2 1

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 Memory-stored 1 Non-stored Memory-stored TX includes quick memory TX. Fixed to 0

0 6 1 Not available

8-94

MODE 001 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic 0000 0001 6 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 Others 000 001 010 6 011 100 Others Meaning Not available Standard Fine Not available Superfine GSR Not available Super GSR Text + photo Not available Much lighter Lighter Normal Darker Much darker Not available Description

7654 Specify which image quality is returned to be assigned after completing operations. *

321 Specify which density is returned to be assigned after FAX communication. *

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

MODE 002 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 (Hex : AB) Feature Logic Meaning Description No means manual print.

Print communication activity report automatically for every 50 activities. * Select when a result report should be printed. *

0 No 1 6 Yes

65

Specifies result reports for 00 No print TX, incomplete TX, or 01 6 Print for broadcasting TX. incomplete TX Always print 10 Not available 11 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

4 3 2 1 0 Print relay result report. Select relay-station print at relay TX. Print memory clear report. *

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available 0 No 1 6 Yes

0 No 1 6 Yes

8-95

MODE 003 Bit 76 5 4 3210

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 (Hex : 33) Feature Logic Meaning Description

00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available Monitor line. (PSTN1) Forwarding reception. (PSTN1) * 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0011 6 Fixed to 0010 Others Not available

MODE 004 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 (Hex : 16) Feature Logic 0000 0001 6 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 Others 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 6 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 Others Meaning Not available 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not available 0 10 min 20 min 30 min 40 min 50 min 1 hr 2 hr 4 hr 8 hr 12 hr 24 hr 72 hr Not available Description Specifies number of rings (calling beeps) before the system starts answering an incoming call.

7654 Select # of rings for automatic reception. *

3210 Selects holding time of incompleted TX document in memory. *

IC memory device Delete file from memory immediately (No redialing function)

8-96

MODE 005 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 20) Feature Logic 0000 0001 0010 6 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 6 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Meaning Description Specifies the number of redialing with the interval specified by Select redialing interval 1 (MODE 042 Bit 7-4).

7654 Select number of redialing 1. (Number of auto redialing at 1st stage)

3210 Select number of redialing 2. (Number of auto redialing at the 2nd stage)

Once redialing set by Select number of redialing 1 (MODE 005 Bit 7-4), the system redials the number of times specified by this soft switch. Redialing interval follows Select redialing interval 2 (MODE 042 Bit 3-0) at the first time and then follows Select redialing interval 1 (MODE 042 Bit 7-4) from the second time.

Note If the first stage sets [0000], the system proceeds to the second stage without the first stage after 10 minutes. If the first and second stages set [0000], the auto redialing function will not be performed.

8-97

MODE 006 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 32) Feature Logic * Meaning Description

Select dial line speed (DP speed). (PSTN1)

This is valid only when 00 6 10 pps 01 20 pps Switch PB/DP (MODE 10 16 pps 006 Bit5) sets DP. 11 Not available 16pps is unavailable to users. 0 DP 1 6 PB 0 Extension connection 1 6 External line connection 00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available DP : pulse PB : tone

Select a line type (tone or pulse) for calling (switch PB/ DP). (PSTN1) * Select standard phone line connected with the system (extension/external line connection). (PSTN1)

32 1 Select PSTN port automatically. Specify how to dial standard phone lines. **

0 No 1 6 Yes

When the system has 2 PSTN lines and one of them is used, you can use the other line by selecting Yes. If you have only 1 PSTN line or wish to use 2 lines for the extension and the external lines separately, select No.

Estimated connection time. (PSTN1)

0 6 17.5 sec 1 52.5 sec

8-98

MODE 007 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 (Hex : B8) Feature Logic 000 001 010 011 100 101 6 110 111 Meaning 0 8 mm 12 mm 14 mm 18 mm 20 mm 24 mm Not available Description

765 Select upper limit of cut-off length after printing: When a received document is longer than the print paper and if the excess length is shorter than that specified here, it is cut off. If it is longer than that specified value with these bits, it is split into multiple pages. This feature is enabled when the following 2 conditions are satisfied: When printing a received document When bit 1 of this mode is 1 * 432 Select upper limit of reduction ratio of received document: When a received document is longer that the print paper, it will be reduced to fit the paper with the upper limit specified with these bits. This feature is enabled when the following 2 conditions are satisfied: When printing a received document When bit 1 of this mode is 0 Example: The reduction is 100-90% when 90% is specified. * 1 Select cut off/reduction of received document: This bit specifies cutting off or reducing a received document that is longer than the print paper. (This feature is enabled when printing a received document.) *

000 001 010 011 100 101 110 6 111

100 % 95 % 90 % 85 % 80 % 65 % 60 % Not available

Reduction will not be done if a received document is still longer than the paper for a specified reduction.

0 6 Reduction 1 Cut off

This bit determines that the received document will be cut off with Select upper limit of cut off length after printing (MODE 007 Bit7-5) or reduced with Select upper limit of reduction ratio of received document (MODE 007 Bit 4-2).

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

8-99

MODE 008 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic Meaning Description Selected by paper size. Selected by drawer. Std method determines an appropriate paper for the length and the width of a print image. Method 1: Same width and no reduction. Method 2: Same width and minimum margin. Method 3: No reduction without considering width of paper. Method 4: Minimum margin without considering width of paper. No wider width will not take printer paper wider than the print image. No Wider Width 1: Same width and no reduction. Width 2: Same width and minimum margin. Width 3: No reduction without considering width of paper. Width 4: Minimum margin without considering width of paper. Same width only selects paper with the same width as the print image.

Where to detect papers. (Valid only when printing a received document)

0 6 From paper From 1 cassette Std method 1 Std method 2 Std method 3 Std method 4 No wider width 1 0101 No wider width 2 0110 No wider width 3 0111 No wider width 4 1000 Same width only Others Not available 00006 0001 0010 0011 0100

6543 Select size of print paper for received document. (Valid only when printing a received document) *

210

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available

8-100

MODE 009 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 (Hex : 1A) Feature Logic Meaning Description Returns Communication mode to its default after each operation. This soft switch is unavailable in some systems: With single port (including pseudo-multi port) G3 type: all are unavailable With multi port PSTN+PSTN: G3-1, G3-2 available

765 Select default display of 000 6 G3-1 communication mode: 011 G3-2 Specifies what to display at Others Not available first as communication mode. *

432 10

110106 Fixed to 11010 Others Not available

MODE 011 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 32) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select dial line speed (DP speed). (PSTN2)

This is valid only when 00 6 10 pps Switch PB/DP (MODE 20 pps 01 006 Bit5) selects DP . 16 pps 10 Not available 16pps is unavailable to 11 users. 0 DP 1 6 PB Extension connection 1 6 External line connection 0 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available DP : pulse PB : tone

Select a line type (tone or pulse) for calling (switch PB/ DP). (PSTN2) * Select standard phone line connected with system (extension/external line connection). (PSTN2)

3 2 Perform F-Net Silent RX. (PSTN2)

0 6 No (No contract) Yes 1 (Contract) 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

1 0 Estimated connection time. (PSTN2)

0 6 17.5 sec 1 52.5 sec

8-101

MODE 012 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : C0) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Display illustrations. Select function of # key on one-touch screen.

0 No 1 6 Yes Full dialing number 1 6 Abbreviated number 0 0 6 Displays size input screen if any change is detected. 1 Always display size input screen without time out. 000006 Fixed to 00000 Others Not available

Select how to input cassette size when Power switch is on.

432 10

MODE 013 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 30) Feature Logic Meaning One- Print touch program 000 001 6 010 011 100 101 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 Description

765 Select numbers of fax onetouches and of print programs on auto-mode screen.

Others Not available 43 Determine input of numbers of copies or of FAX destinations on auto-mode screen. 00 01 6 10 Others Regards these digits as an 1 digit input of number of copies. 2 digit 3 digit Not available

210

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available

8-102

MODE 014 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 000 6 001 010 011 100 Others Meaning 10 sec 30 sec 60 sec 120 sec 180 sec Not available Description

765 Select redialing interval for resending document.

432 10

000006 Fixed to 00000 Others Not available

MODE 018 Bit 76 54

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic Meaning Description

00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available Select destination screen: Displays screen of destination when document is loaded in FAX mode. * 00 6 One-touch 1st screen 01 Not available 10 Dial number screen 11 Index screen 00006 Fixed to 0000 Others Not available

3210

8-103

MODE 020 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic Meaning Description Yes displays # of pages on phone line in addition to ordinary # of papers. Yes prints result of protocol trace after completing communication. If next communication is proceeded before this printing, information on previous communication protocol will be deleted. Yes displays # of error lines/transmission speed on panel and outputs port for auto checking. Specifies interval for monitoring phone lines for G3 communication. Yes displays error codes (6 digit) on panel and in report.

Displays # of reports.

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes

Trace protocol.

Display number of error lines/ transmission speed.

0 6 No 1 Yes

Select monitor interval for line. Display error codes. (Panel, report)

0 6 Phase A 1 All phases 0 6 No 1 Yes

210

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available

MODE 021 Bit 765 43 2

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic Meaning Description

000006 Fixed to 00000 Others Not available Display symbol rate. 0 6 No 1 Yes Symbol rates are 2400/ 2743/2800/3000/3200/ 3429. Rate of 2743 is not actually used.

1 0

Observe EQM. Check modem & line statuses Observe probing information. Check modem & line statuses

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes

8-104

MODE 022 Bit 765 43 2

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 02) Feature Logic Meaning Description

000006 Fixed to 00000 Others Not available FAX memory nearly full to its capacity 0 6 256 KB 1 512 KB Memory nearly full means that unused memory becomes less than a specified capacity. This soft switch specifies threshold capacity. If Yes is selected, then all relay transmissions will proceed with A4 size when function of remote side is unknown (not learned/full dialing). For learned destination without size of 16 15.4, TX will be done with 87.7.

Restrict parameters of memory stored TX.

0 No 1 6 Yes

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

8-105

MODE 023 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 (Hex : FE) Feature Logic 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 11116 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Specifies whether margin process will be proceeded for report with image margins. Meaning Description

7654 Select number of errors in redialing terminal of data type.

Set margins for report image.*

0 No 1 6 Yes

21 0 Select memory over transmission mode.

11 6 Fixed to 11 Others Not available 0 6 Transmission continued 1 Transmission disconnected Specifies whether stored pages will be transmitted if memory is full while scanning documents.

MODE 024 Bit 76 5 4 3 21 0

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 81) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Allow G4 RX. Display Administrator/User passwords. Display forwarding function button. Select alarm buzzer pattern.

10 6 Fixed to 10 Others Not available 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 Pattern 0 1 Pattern 1 00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available No displays * .

Receive by other user.

0 No 1 6 Yes

8-106

MODE 025 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Hex : 7F) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Service call for printer option failure. Service call for printer failure.

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes Specifies whether service call will be made for printer failure. Note Specifies whether service call will be made for exceeding specified # of papers. Note Set whether service call will be made for scanner failure. Note Set whether service call will be made for reaching near life cycle of toner A and/or drum A. Note Set whether service call will be made for reaching life cycle of toner A and/or drum A. Note Set whether service call will be made for reaching near life cycle of toner B and/or drum B. Note Set whether service call will be made for reaching life cycle of toner B and/or drum B. Note

Service call for exceeding specified number of papers.

Service call for scanner failure. Service call for reaching nearly life cycles of toner A and/or drum A. Service call for reaching life times of toner A and/or drum A. Service call for reaching nearly life cycles of toner B and/or drum B. Service call for reaching life times of toner B and/or drum B.

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes

0 No 1 6 Yes

0 No 1 6 Yes

0 No 1 6 Yes

Note This is valid only when Allow service call? (MODE 026 Bit 6) is set to Yes.

8-107

MODE 026 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 (Hex : DE) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Allow remote maintenance. Allow service calls.

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

Print incomplete TX of service call for notifying consumables. Service call for empty toner. Service call for reaching life cycle of drum. Notify out-of-consumables.

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

8-108

MODE 027 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 24) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select ID display order: Specifies priority order of destination ID for printing report/ displaying on screen.

00 6 Pattern 1 Pattren1:123456 01 Pattern 2 2:456123 10 Pattern 3 3:451236 11 Not available 1: Name registered in onetouch button 2: Destination # registered in one-touch button 3: Phone # of destination dialed 4: Destination phone # by TSI 5: Extended ID 6: Standard ID (# of TSI/ CIG)

5 4 3 2 1

Display anti-dew button. Process drum dry button. Secure comm. with N-method F code function. Assign non-reduction TX for 2-to-1 scan. *

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes Need for G3 and G3-i communications. Specifies whether 2-to-1 page TX will be sent by A4 always or by appropriate size to receivers capability.

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

8-109

MODE 028 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex : 63) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 0, valid at TX

Select remote copy protocol.

0 6 F code 1 N method 0000000 Not available (same as 1 print) 1 print

6543 Select restricted number of 210 prints of remote multi copy.

0000001 11000116 99 copies Others Not available (same as 99 copies)

MODE 030 Bit 7 65

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 31) Feature Logic Meaning Description

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available Rotate print of FAX RX. * Sort means alternate No rotate sort here. print 01 6 Rotate print (without sort) Rotate print 10 (with sort) Not available 11 00 0 No 1 6 Yes 00 6 No B5(L), A5 (L), and postcard No A5(L) and 01 postcard No postcard 10 Not available 11 00 6 Select mm only 01 Select inch only Select both 10 Not available 11

4 32

Receive 2-to-1 page. (Valid for RX print) * Restrict print paper selection: Specifies unselectable paper (including orientation) for FAX.

10

Assign mixed mm/inch papers. (Priority Set) (Valid for RX print)

8-110

MODE 031 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 80) Feature Logic 0 1 6 Meaning No Yes Description Valid when Set margins for report image? (MODE 23 Bit 3) is set to Yes.

Margin process for multiple copies of report with image margins. Assign output format for image margin report.

0 6 1

Same as 1: Always output with A5 regular report format regardless of Always A5 the set status of format paper. This is valid when a cassette has A4C papers.

543 210

0000006 Fixed to 000000 Others Not available

MODE 032 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 71) Feature Logic Meaning Description

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available Detect jamming of short doc. 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 GSR 1 6 Super GSR Yes regards documents less than 70 mm as jamming. GSR: 8 line/mm7.7 line/mm (200 dpi) Super GSR:16 line/mm 15.4 line/mm (400 dpi)

Assign scan mode when FAX mixed with photos is selected.

4 3 21 0

Select metric/inch for FAX TX. Set zoom ratio for reducing legal/letter.

0 mm 1 6 inch 0 6 64.7 % 1 77.2 % 00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available

Set print mode corresponding to MFP.

Regular printing 1 6 Emulator printing

Emulator printing indicates size mismatch without reduction, splitting, or printing on a larger size paper if there is no paper of the same size as the image.

8-111

MODE 033 Bit 76 54

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic Meaning Description

00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available Select draft printing mode. No draft mode 01 6 Toner saving mode 10 High resolution saving mode 11 Not available 00 Toner saving mode follows # of skipped pixels (bit 3-2). High resolution saving mode, in which each pixels size will be reduced, follows # of skipped pixels (bit 3-2) for only at points of transition between white-black along the direction of main scanning.

32

Select draft printing level.

00 No skipping Specifies skipped printing 01 6 Skip 1/4 pixel level for copy, RX, and 10 Skip 2/4 pixel report printing. 11 Skip 3/4 pixel 00 6 No skipping Specifies skipped printing 01 Skip 1/4 pixel level for PC print. 10 Skip 2/4 pixel 11 Skip 3/4 pixel

10

Select draft printing level between MFP .

8-112

MODE 034 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 02) Feature Logic 00006 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Meaning 0 2 mm 4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm 18 mm 20 mm 22 mm 24 mm 26 mm 28 mm 30 mm Description Valid only at RX printing.

7654 Select cut off length at leading edge of paper.

3 2 1

Set special density.

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

Overlap printing.

0 No 1 6 Yes

Valid only at RX printing. Overlapped print is fixed to 4mm regardless of line density. Document exceeding upper limit will be regarded as jamming. Notice that document more than 2m with superfine image resolution for nonstorage TX will report communication error.

Select upper limit for long document.

0 6 1m 1 4m

MODE 035 Bit 765 432 1 0

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex : 03) Feature Logic Meaning Description

0000006 Fixed to 000000 Others Not available RX by memory when reaching I/C lifetime. RX by memory when reaching toner empty. 0 1 6 0 1 6 No Yes No Yes

8-113

MODE 037 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 210

Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (Hex : F8) Feature Logic * * * * * Meaning Description

Select FAX paper cassette (1st cassette). Select FAX paper cassette (2nd cassette). Select FAX paper cassette (3rd cassette). Select FAX paper cassette (4th cassette). Select FAX paper cassette (5th cassette).

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available

MODE 038 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 0 6 Meaning On when all cassettes are out of paper On when at least one cassette is out of paper Description

Turn on print lamp when outof-paper.

6543 210

00000006 Fixed to 0000000 Others Not available

8-114

MODE 040 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 (Hex : FA) Feature Logic Meaning Description No : MH Yes : MH+MR Yes: MH+MR+MMR Valid only when 2-dim coding? (MODE 040 Bit 7) is set to Yes.

2-dim coding at TX. (Valid for G3 communication) T.6 coding. (Valid for G3 communication)

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes

JBIG communication. (Valid for ECM communication) Third partys JBIG (ITU-T) communication. (Valid for ECM communication) Proprietary JBIG (ITU-T) communication. (Valid for ECM communication)

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes Valid only when JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5) is set to Yes. Valid only when JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5) is Yes.

0 No 1 6 Yes

2 1 JBIG capability at V.34 communication.

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available 0 No 1 6 Yes Valid only when JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5) is set to Yes.

0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available

MODE 041 Bit 7 6 543 210

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic 0 6 1 Meaning Not available No Yes No : G3 Yes. : G3+ECM Description Fixed to 0

ECM mode.

0 1 6

0000006 Fixed to 000000 Others Not available

8-115

MODE 042 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Hex : 3F) Feature Logic 0000 0001 0010 0011 6 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 6 Meaning Not available 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min 10 min 11 min 12 min 13 min 14 min 15 min Not available 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min 10 min 11 min 12 min 13 min 14 min 15 min Description

7654 Select redialing interval 1.

3210 Select redialing interval 2.

8-116

MODE 043 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 80) Feature Logic 00 0 01 1 10 6 2 11 3 0 6 Fixed to 0 1 Not available Meaning Description

# of resending document.

5 4 3210 Redialing when line is connected but no answer.

0 6 No 1 Yes 00006 Fixed to 0000 Others Not available

8-117

MODE 044 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : A0) Feature Logic 0 Meaning Description Specifies # of error lines as reference of sending RTN: 32 lines or more: MCF if error lines are 0 31 RTN if error lines are 32 or more 64 lines or more: MCF if error lines are 0 31 RTP if error lines are 32 to 63 RTN if error lines are 64 or more

Select threshold value for RTN sending error trace.

32 lines or more 1 6 64 lines or more

6 5 4 3

Process TCF sending specially. Select T1 timer. Select T4 timer. (for line delay) Take action for communication error from overseas. Take action for communication error from overseas. Process RTN RX failure.

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 30 sec 1 6 60 sec 0 6 3 sec 1 4.5 sec 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No (discard as error) Yes 1 (not as error) 0 6 No (discard as error) Yes 1 (answer) Select No unless bad line is experienced. Select No unless bad line is experienced.

Retrain V. 34 control channel.

8-118

MODE 047 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 88) Feature Logic 000 001 010 011 100 6 Others 000 001 010 6 011 100 Others Meaning 0 1 2 3 4 Not available 0 1 2 3 4 Not available Description

765 Select V. 34 fall back tolerance. (TX)

432 Select V. 34 fall back tolerance. (RX)

10

00 6 Fixed to 00 Others Not available

MODE 048 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 (Hex : C6) Feature Logic 00 Meaning Description

Select V.34/V.33/V.17 capabilities.

No capability Sets MODEMs function above 9600 bps V.33 01 V.17 & V.33 10 11 6 V.17 & V.33 & V.34 000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available

543 2 1 0 Allow V.34. Allow V. 8. Allow V.34 communication for extensions.

0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 V.34 1 V.17

Should be same as V.8 (MODE 48 Bit 1) Should be same as V.8 (MODE 48 Bit 2)

8-119

MODE 049 Bit 765

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Hex : 0D) Feature Logic Meaning Description

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 011016 Others Need to disable V.34 2400 bps 4800 bps capability (MODE 048 7200 bps Bit 2) by setting No for 9600 bps 2400 bps. 16.8 kbps or faster is 12.0 kbps 14.4 kbps valid only when Allow 16.8 kbps V.34? (MODE 048 Bit 2) 19.2 kbps is enabled (Yes). 21.6 kbps 24.0 kbps 26.4 kbps 28.8 kbps 31.2 kbps 33.6 kbps Not available

432 Select upper limit of 10 transmission speed. (TX)

MODE 050 Bit 765

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Hex : 0D) Feature Logic Meaning Description

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 011016 Others Need to disable V.34 2400 bps 4800 bps capability (MODE 048 7200 bps Bit 2) by setting No for 9600 bps 2400 bps. 16.8 kbps or faster is 12.0 kbps 14.4 kbps valid only when Allow 16.8 kbps V.34? (MODE 048 Bit 2) 19.2 kbps is enabled (Yes). 21.6 kbps 24.0 kbps 26.4 kbps 28.8 kbps 31.2 kbps 33.6 kbps Not available

432 Select upper limit of 10 transmission speed. (RX)

8-120

MODE 051 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 20) Feature Logic 000 001 6 010 011 100 101 Meaning Description Specifies declaration value of printing function for RX. Auto selects max size of paper, max size of loaded cassette, or max size of the last paper. Auto including rotation is equivalent to A4L set even A4T is selected by MODE 008 Bit 7.

765 Declare size of print paper for received document.

Not available Auto A4 B4 A3 Auto including rotation Others Not available

432 10

000006 Fixed to 00000 Others Not available

MODE 052 Bit 7 6543 210

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 0 6 1 Meaning Not restricted Restricted Description

Relay TX mode (Nonrestricted/restricted)

00000006 Fixed to 0000000 Others Not available

MODE 054 Bit 7654 3

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 (Hex : 0A) Feature Logic Meaning Description

00006 Fixed to 0000 Others Not available Control history of V.34 auto dialing. Modulation method for V.34 manual, nonstorage TX. Modulation method for V.34 polling TX document. Modulation method for V.34 manual RX. 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 V.17 1 V.34 0 V.17 1 6 V.34 0 6 V.17 1 V.34 Valid only when a receiver system has V.34 modulation.

2 1 0

8-121

MODE 055 Bit 765 43

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 0C) Feature Logic Meaning Description

000 6 Fixed to 000 Others Not available Select timing at starting ANSam TX. 00 0.5 sec 01 6 1.0 sec 10 1.5 sec 11 2.0 sec 000 001 010 011 100 6 101 110 111 2.0 sec 2.5 sec 3.0 sec 3.5 sec 4.0 sec 5.0 sec 6.0 sec Not available

210 Select sending time of ANSam.

MODE 082 Bit 76 5 4 3 210

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 28) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 00

00 6 Others Not available Detect busy tone. (PSTN1) 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 1 Not available Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity). (PSTN1) 0 No 1 6 Yes 000 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 0

Fixed to 000

8-122

MODE 083 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 22) Feature Logic 0000 0001 00106 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 00106 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Meaning 15 msec 30 msec 50 msec 75 msec 100 msec 125 msec 150 msec 175 msec 200 msec 225 msec 250 msec 275 msec 300 msec 325 msec 350 msec 400 msec 15 msec 30 msec 50 msec 75 msec 100 msec 125 msec 150 msec 175 msec 200 msec 225 msec 250 msec 275 msec 300 msec 325 msec 350 msec 400 msec Description Valid only when DP/PB switch (MODE 006 Bit 5) selects DP.

7654 DP steady current time 1: Set interval from S relay ON to DP photo coupler ON. (PSTN1)

3210 DP steady current time 2: Set interval from S relay ON to DP photo coupler ON. (PSTN1)

Valid only when DP/PB switch (MODE 006 Bit 5) selects DP.

8-123

MODE 084 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 54) Feature Logic Meaning Description

DP make rate. (PSTN1)

00 33 % 01 6 44 % Others Not available 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 01016 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 1 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 8 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm 16 dBm Instantaneous monitor timer = 5 ms/ off monitor timer = 40 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 15 ms/ off monitor timer = 30 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 25 ms/ off monitor timer = 20 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 35 ms/ off monitor timer = 10 ms

5432 Select PB sending level. (PSTN1)

10

Select PB detection method. (PSTN1)

00 6 Method 1

01

Method 2

10

Method 3

11

Method 4

8-124

MODE 085 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 80) Feature Logic 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Others Meaning 9 dBm 10 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm 16 dBm Not available Description Specifies TX levels other than PB.

7654 Select TX level. (PSTN1)

3210

00006 Others Not available

Fixed to 0000

MODE 086 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic 00 01 6 10 11 Meaning 0 dB (48 dBm) 5 dB (43 dBm) 10 dB (38 dBm) 15 dB (33 dBm) Description Signals controlled by this soft switch are 1300Hz detection, PB tone detection, V29 & V27 ter, V21 signal detection, and all tonal signal.

Select RX attenuator. (PSTN1)

543 210

0000006 Others Not available

Fixed to 000000

MODE 087 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 90) Feature Logic 00 01 10 6 11 000 001 010 6 011 Others 000 6 Others Meaning No detection 1.8 sec 3.0 sec 10 sec 10-27.5 Hz 10-75 Hz 10-90 Hz 10-200 Hz Not available Fixed to 000 Not available Description

Select detection time of continuous ringer. (PSTN1)

543 Select frequency for ringer detection. (PSTN1)

210

8-125

MODE 088 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 0

0 6 1 Not available Select process mode at detection time out of 2nd dial tone. (PSTN1) 0 Keeps same operation as before detection even after time out 1 6 Generates TX error at time out
0000006

543 210

Fixed to 000000

Others Not available

MODE 089 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select TX method. (PSTN1)

0 6 Insert pause after prefix for external lines 1 Insert pause after 1st dial 0 6 Dial # search method 1 Pause search method * 00006 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 Others 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not available Valid only when Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines (MODE 089 Bit6) is set to Dial # search method.

Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines. (PSTN1)

5432 Select prefix # for external lines. (PSTN1)

10

00 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 00

8-126

MODE 092 Bit 7 6 5 43

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 70) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Send V.29 echo protection tone. (PSTN1) Send V.17 echo protection tone. (PSTN1) Send V.33 echo protection tone. (PSTN1) Select V.17 and V.33 carrier frequency. (PSTN1)

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 00 1800 Hz 01 1700 Hz 10 6 1800 +1700 Hz 11 Not available 000 6 Others Not available Fixed to 000

210

MODE 093 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 48) Feature Logic Meaning Description Specifies time interval from line connection to starting sending CED Specifies frequency to carry CED or N/A selection. Specifies whether CED echo will be processed by set interval of 500 ms between CED and initial identification. Specifies whether incoming echo will be processed by set interval of 500 ms between receiving initial identification and incoming command. Fixed to 00

Select timing for starting CED sending. (PSTN1) Select CED frequency. (PSTN1)

00 0 msec 01 6 2000 msec 10 2500 msec 11 Not available 00 6 2100 Hz 1080 Hz 01 1300 Hz 10 Not available 11 0 No 1 6 Yes

54

Process CED echo. (PSTN1)

Process incoming command echo. (PSTN1)

0 6 No 1 Yes

10

00 6 Others Not available

8-127

MODE 094 Bit 7654 3 2 1 0

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 0C) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 0000

00006 Others Not available Lock AGC in V.33 mode. (PSTN1) Lock AGC in V.17 mode. (PSTN1) Lock AGC in V.29 mode. (PSTN1) Lock AGC in V.27ter mode. (PSTN1) 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes

MODE 095 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 20) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Adjust digital TX cable equalizer. (PSTN1)

00 6 0 dB 01 4 dB 10 8 dB 11 12 dB 00 0 dB 01 4 dB 10 6 8 dB 12 dB 11 00006 Others Not available For V.29, actual value will be 4 dB more than the specified value. Fixed to 0000

54

Adjust digital RX cable equalizer. (PSTN1)

3210

8-128

MODE 096 Bit 76 54

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 00 Use this soft switch for error in V8 sequence.

00 6 Others Not available Select time for CI signal sending ON. (PSTN1) 00 0.5 sec 01 6 1.0 sec 10 1.5 sec 11 2.0 sec 000 001 010 6 011 100 101 Others 0.4 sec 0.8 sec 1.0 sec 1.2 sec 1.6 sec 2.0 sec Not available

321 Select time for CI signal sending OFF. (PSTN1)

Use this soft switch for error in V8 sequence.

0 6 1 Not available

Fixed to 0

8-129

MODE 097 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic Meaning Description Specifies whether sending level of TCF and NTCF will be attenuated. For V33/V29, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4 and MODE 097 Bit 6. Otherwise, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4. Specifies whether sending level of V17/V33/V29 will be attenuated. Level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4 and MODE 097 Bit 6. Fixed to 0

Attenuate TCF/NTCF sending level. (PSTN1)

0 6 No 1 Yes 3 dB

Attenuate V17/V33/V29 sending level. (PSTN1)

0 6 No 1 Yes 3 dB

5 432 Select V.34 symbol rate. (PSTN1)

0 6 1 Not available 000 001 010 011 100 101 6 Others 2400 Sym/S Not available 2800 Sym/S 3000 Sym/S 3200 Sym/S 3429 Sym/S Not available

10

00 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 00

8-130

MODE 098 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 (Hex : 46) Feature Logic Meaning Description Use this soft switch for error in V8 sequence.

Select starting time of sending CI signal. (PSTN1)

00 0 sec 01 6 1 sec 10 2 sec 11 3 sec 00 6 Others Not available 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 01106 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 Others 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not available

54 3210 Select EQM threshold value. (PSTN1)

Fixed to 00

8-131

MODE 099 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 88) Feature Logic 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Meaning Description Specifies range of tolerance for characteristic distortion of V. 34 line.

7654 Select threshold value 1 for symbol speed. (PSTN1)

3210 Select threshold value 2 for symbol speed. (PSTN1)

Specifies minimum tolerance level of S/N ratio in V.34

8-132

MODE 112 Bit 76 5 4 3 210

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 28) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 00

00 6 Others Not available Detect busy tone. (PSTN2) 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 1 Not available Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity). (PSTN2) 0 No 1 6 Yes 000 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 0

Fixed to 000

8-133

MODE 113 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 (Hex : 22) Feature Logic 0000 0001 00106 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 00106 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Meaning 15 msec 30 msec 50 msec 75 msec 100 msec 125 msec 150 msec 175 msec 200 msec 225 msec 250 msec 275 msec 300 msec 325 msec 350 msec 400 msec 15 msec 30 msec 50 msec 75 msec 100 msec 125 msec 150 msec 175 msec 200 msec 225 msec 250 msec 275 msec 300 msec 325 msec 350 msec 400 msec Description Valid only when DP/PB switch (MODE 011 Bit 5) selects DP.

7654 DP steady current time 1: Set interval from S relay ON to DP photo coupler ON. (PSTN2)

3210 DP steady current time 2: Set interval from S relay ON to DP photo coupler ON. (PSTN2)

Valid only when DP/PB switch (MODE 011 Bit 5) selects DP.

8-134

MODE 114 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 54) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select DP make rate. (PSTN2)

00 33 % 01 6 44 % Others Not available 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 01016 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 1 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 8 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm 16 dBm Instantaneous monitor timer = 5 ms/ off monitor timer = 40 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 15 ms/ off monitor timer = 30 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 25 ms/ off monitor timer = 20 ms Instantaneous monitor timer = 35 ms/ off monitor timer = 10 ms

5432 Select PB sending level. (PSTN2)

10

Select PB detection method. (PSTN2)

00 6 Method 1

01

Method 2

10

Method 3

11

Method 4

8-135

MODE 115 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 80) Feature Logic 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Others Meaning 9 dBm 10 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm 16 dBm Not available Description Specifies TX levels other than PB.

7654 Select TX level. (PSTN2)

3210

00006 Others Not available

Fixed to 0000

MODE 116 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic 00 01 6 10 11 Meaning 0 dB (48 dBm) 5 dB (43 dBm) 10 dB (38 dBm) 15 dB (33 dBm) Description Signals controlled by this soft switch are 1300Hz detection, PB tone detection, V29 & V27 ter, V21 signal detection, and all tonal signals.

Select RX attenuator. (PSTN2)

543 210

0000006 Others Not available

Fixed to 000000

MODE 117 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 90) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select detection time of continuous ringer. (PSTN2)

No detection 00 1.8 sec 01 10 6 3.0 sec 10 sec 11 000 001 010 6 011 Others 10-27.5 Hz 10-75 Hz 10-90 Hz 10-200 Hz Not available Fixed to 000

543 Select frequency for ringer detection. (PSTN2)

210

000 6 Others Not available

8-136

MODE 118 Bit 7 6

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 40) Feature Logic 0 6 1 Meaning Description Fixed to 0

Select process mode at detection time out of 2nd dial tone. (PSTN2)

Keeps same operation as before detection even after time out 1 6 Generates TX error at time out
0000006

543 210

Fixed to 000000

Others Not available

MODE 119 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00 Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select dialing method. (PSTN2)

0 6 Insert pause after prefix for external lines 1 Insert pause after 1st dial 0 6 Dial # search method 1 Pause search method * 00006 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 Others 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not available Valid only when Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines (MODE 119 Bit 6) is set to Dial # search method.

Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines. (PSTN2)

5432 Select prefix # for external lines. (PSTN1)

10

00 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 00

8-137

MODE 122 Bit 7 6 5 43

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 70) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Send V.29 echo protection tone. (PSTN2) Send V.17 echo protection tone. (PSTN2) Send V.33 echo protection tone. (PSTN2) Select V.17 and V.33 carrier frequency. (PSTN1)

0 6 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 00 1800 Hz 01 1700 Hz 10 6 1800 +1700 Hz 11 Not available 000 6 Others Not available Fixed to 000

210

MODE 123 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 48) Feature Logic Meaning Description Specifies the time interval from line connection to start sending CED Specifies the frequency to carry CED or disable selection. Determines whether CED echo will be processed by specified interval of 500 ms between CED and initial identification. Determines whether incoming echo will be processed by the specified interval of 500 ms between receiving initial identification and incoming command. Fixed to 00

Select timing for starting CED sending. (PSTN2) Select CED frequency. (PSTN2)

00 0 msec 01 6 2000 msec 10 2500 msec 11 Not available 00 6 2100 Hz 1080 Hz 01 1300 Hz 10 Not available 11 0 No 1 6 Yes

54

Process CED echo. (PSTN2)

Process incoming command echo. (PSTN2)

0 6 No 1 Yes

10

00 6 Others Not available

8-138

MODE 124 Bit 7654 3 2 1 0

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 0C) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 0000

00006 Others Not available Lock AGC in V.33 mode. (PSTN2) Lock AGC in V.17 mode. (PSTN2) Lock AGC in V.29 mode. (PSTN2) Lock AGC in V.27ter mode. (PSTN2) 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 No 1 6 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes 0 6 No 1 Yes

MODE 125 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 20) Feature Logic Meaning Description

Select digital TX cable equalizer. (PSTN2) Select digital RX cable equalizer. (PSTN2)

00 6 0 dB 01 4 dB 10 8 dB 11 12 dB 00 0 dB 01 4 dB 10 6 8 dB 12 dB 11 00006 Others Not available For V.29, the actual value will be 4 dB more than the specified value. Fixed to 0000

54

3210

8-139

MODE 126 Bit 76 54

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 00 Use this soft switch for error in V8 sequence.

00 6 Others Not available Select time for CI signal sending ON. (PSTN2) 00 0.5 sec 01 6 1.0 sec 10 1.5 sec 11 2.0 sec 000 001 010 6 011 100 101 Others 0.4 sec 0.8 sec 1.0 sec 1.2 sec 1.6 sec 2.0 sec Not available

321 Select time for CI signal sending OFF. (PSTN2)

Use this soft switch for error in a V8 sequence.

0 6 1 Not available

Fixed to 0

8-140

MODE 127 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 14) Feature Logic Meaning Description Specifies whether sending level of TCF and NTCF will be attenuated. For V33/V29, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4 and MODE 127 Bit 6. Otherwise, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4. Specifies whether sending level of V17/V33/V29 will be attenuated. Level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4. Fixed to 0

Attenuate TCF/NTCF sending level. (PSTN2)

0 6 No 1 Yes 3 dB

Attenuate V17/V33/V29 sending level. (PSTN2)

0 6 No 1 Yes 3 dB

5 432 Select V.34 symbol rate. (PSTN2)

0 6 1 Not available 000 001 010 011 100 101 6 Others 2400 Sym/S Not available 2800 Sym/S 3000 Sym/S 3200 Sym/S 3429 Sym/S Not available

10

00 6 Others Not available

Fixed to 00

8-141

MODE 128 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 (Hex : 46) Feature Logic Meaning Description Use this soft switch for error in a V8 sequence.

Select starting time of sending CM signal. (PSTN2)

00 0 sec 01 6 1 sec 10 2 sec 11 3 sec 00 6 Others Not available 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 01106 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 Others 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not available

54 3210 Select EQM threshold value. (PSTN2)

Fixed to 00

8-142

MODE 129 Bit

Factory setting bit : 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 88) Feature Logic 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 10006 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Meaning Description Specifies range of tolerance for characteristic distortion of V. 34 line.

7654 Select threshold value 1 for symbol speed. (PSTN2)

3210 Select threshold value 2 for symbol speed. (PSTN2)

Specifies minimum tolerance level of S/N ratio in V.34.

MODE 145 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 (Hex : 07) Feature Logic Meaning Not available 1 7 Not available Description Set in binary code.

7654 Select value of layer 2 link N3. 00000000 3210 (# of outstanding) 00000001 000001116 Others

8-143

MODE 146 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 01) Feature Logic Meaning Description Set in binary code.

7654 Select # of layer 3 logical 3210 channels.

000000006 1 00000010 2 Others Not available

MODE 147 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 (Hex : 07) Feature Logic 00000000 00000001 000001116 00001111 Others Meaning Not available 1 7 15 Not available Description Set in binary code. Select 7 when layer 3 module is 8, and 1-15 when 128, respectively.

7654 Select size of layer 3 packet 3210 window.

MODE 190 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 0 6 1 Meaning No Yes Description For risk management according to new recommendation of G3 high resolution transmission For risk management according to new recommendation of G3 high resolution transmission Fixed to 000000

Restrict SF/SSF communication (TX).

Restrict SF/SSF communication (RX).

0 6 1

No Yes

543 210

0000006 Others Not available

8-144

MODE 192 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : C0) Feature Logic 00 Meaning Year-MonthDate (default in Japan) Not available Date-monthyear Month-dateyear (default in North America) Fixed to 000000 Description

Select order of displaying year to date.

01 10 11 6

543 210

0000006 Others Not available

MODE 300-305

REV soft switches for maintenance

MODE 400 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic * 0 6 1 Meaning No Yes Description Holds image data even after ejecting last page to select enable/disable to recall it. Selects priority doc mixed mode when Power source is ON and panel reset key is ON. Fixed to 000000

Set memory recall (copy).

Set priority doc mixed mode (copy). *

0 6 1

No Yes

543 210

0000006 Others Not available

8-145

MODE 402 Bit 7 65

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 22) Feature Logic 0 6 1 00 01 6 Others * 00 6 01 10 11 0 6 1 Meaning 1 sided 2 sided 1 sided copy 2 sided copy Not available APS AMS Not available Manual Not available FAX Copy Auto-mode screen Not available Selects initial screen (copy, FAX, or automode). APS: Auto Paper Selection. AMS: Auto Magnification Selection. Fixed to 0 Description

Select priority doc mode. (copy) Select priority print mode. (copy) Select automatic function priority mode. (copy)

43

2 10 Select priority application. (after auto clear and panel reset)

0 01 10 6 11

MODE 403 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 01) Feature Logic 0 6 * 1 Meaning Description

Select print saving magnification. (copy)

Recommended Set magnification for 2magnification to-1 page, 4-to-1 page, None Booklet creation, or 2to-1 page split. Fixed to 000000 Selects whether to do panel reset or not when ID key will be pressed.

654 321 0 Auto-reset by user. (copy) *

0000006 Others Not available 0 1 6 No Yes

MODE 404 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 01) Feature Logic 00000000 000000016 11110000 11111111 Others Meaning Not reset 1 min 240 min 30 sec Not available Description For every 1 min Select whether autoclear will proceed if there is no operation for a certain time after copy or operation.

7654 Select auto-clear time. 3210

8-146

MODE 405 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 (Hex : 0F) Feature Logic 00000001 000011116 11110000 Others Meaning 1 min 15 min 240 min Not available Description For every 1 min Select whether autopre-heating will proceed if no operation for a certain time after copy or operation.

7654 Select pre-heating time. 3210

MODE 406 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 3C) Feature Logic 00000000 Meaning Description

7654 Select auto Power source off 3210 time.

No For every 1 min Power source off Select whether auto 00000001 1 min Power source off will proceed if there is no 001111006 60 min operation for a certain time after copy or 11110000 240 min operation. Also, select Others Not available its time. No auto Power source off if Select auto Power source off (MODE 416 Bit 0) is set to No.

MODE 407 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Hex : 01) Feature Logic * 00000000 000000016 11110000 Others Meaning No panel off 1 min 240 min Not available Description For every 1 min Select whether auto panel off will proceed if no operation for a certain time, or after operation.

7654 Select panel off time. 3210

8-147

MODE 408 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 00006 0001 0010 0011 0100 1010 1100 Others 00006 Others Meaning 1st drawer 2nd drawer 3rd drawer 4th drawer 5th drawer Manual LCC Not available Not available Description Selects priority drawer when APS (auto paper mode) or manual mode is selected.

7654 Select drawer. (paper) (Copy) *

3210

Fixed to 0000

MODE 409 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 08) Feature Logic * 00 6 01 Others Meaning Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Not available Description
Pattern 1: 1 3 2 4 Pattern 2: 1 2 3 4

Select default 4-to-1 page order. (Copy)

Select default exposure level. (Copy)

0 6 1 0000 01006 1000 Others

AE Manual Txt/Photo mode Txt mode Photo mode Not available Not available Photo mode is unavailable if MODE 409 Bit 5 selects AE (auto).

4321 Select priority doc level. (Copy)

0 6 1

Fixed to 0

8-148

MODE 410 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 44) Feature Logic 00 6 01 10 11 00 6 Others 0000 0001 0010 0011 01006 0101 0110 0111 1000 Others Meaning Darker Normal Not available Lighter Not available EXP 1 EXP 2 EXP 3 EXP 4 EXP 5 EXP 6 EXP 7 EXP 8 EXP 9 Not available Selects manual density level at mode initialization or level when auto density is switched to manual density: EXP1 (lighter) | EXP5 (normal) | EXP9 (darker) Description Specifies level of auto density.

Select AE print density level. (Copy)

54 3210 Select priority manual density level. (Copy)

Fixed to 00

MODE 411 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 0 6 1 00006 Others * 000 011 Others + Meaning Description Selects direction (+/) of print density adjustment by MODE 411 Bit 2-0. Fixed to 0000 Not available 0 3 Not available Selects print density by adjusting development bias.

Select sign bit. (Copy)

6543 210 Adjust print density. (Copy)

8-149

MODE 412 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 08) Feature Logic 00 6 01 10 11 0 6 1 Meaning Description

Select auto sort mode. (Copy)

Sort off mode Specifies mode of paper Sort on mode ejection when ejector Not available option is attached. Grouping mode No Yes Settable with other functions except MODE 412 Bit 7-6 Sort off mode. Settable with other functions of MODE 412 Bit 7-6. Determines sort onsort off or sort offsort on will proceed according to # of documents Fixed to 000 Not available

Select auto staple mode. (Copy)

Select auto punch mode. (Copy)

0 6 1 0 1 6

No Yes No Yes

Select sort on/off auto switch. (Copy)

210

000 6 Others

MODE 413 Bit 76 5

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (Hex : 04) Feature Logic Meaning Description Fixed to 00

00 6 Others Not available Select FAX output bin. *

0 6 1st tray Specifies FAX tray when 1 Elevate or tray Finisher or Mail-bin finisher is attached. 0 6 1st tray Specifies PC print tray 1 Elevate or tray when Finisher or Mail-bin finisher is attached. 0 6 1 Not available Fixed to 0 Specifies copy output bin when Job tray is attached. Specifies FAX output bin when Job tray is attached. Specifies PC print output bin when Job tray is attached.

Select PC print output bin.

3 2 1 0 Select copy output bin. Select FAX output bin. Select PC print output bin. * * *

0 1st bin 1 6 2nd bin 0 6 1st bin 1 2nd bin 0 6 1st bin 1 2nd bin

8-150

MODE 414 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 70) Feature Logic 0101 0110 01116 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 Others Meaning 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 Not available Description Shows image compression ratio per copied document for reserving it into copy memory. Reserved necessary capacity of memory for determined compression ratio before starting scanning. Fixed to 0000

7654 Select image compression ratio for reserving into copy memory.

3210

00006 Others Not available

MODE 415 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 6C) Feature * Logic 000 6 001 010 011 100 101 Others 000 001 010 011 6 100 101 Others 00 6 Others Meaning 0 (no sound) 1 2 3 4 5 Not available 0 (no sound) 1 2 3 4 5 Not available Not available Description 6 stage adjustment of key buzzer

765 Select sound volume 1. (Buzzer)

432 Select sound volume 2. (Alarm)

6 stage adjustment for alarm

10

Fixed to 00

8-151

MODE 416 Bit

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 60) Feature * Logic 000 001 010 011 6 100 101 Others 00006 Others Meaning 0 (no sound) 1 2 3 4 5 Not available Not available No Yes Specifies whether MODE 406 can be set to No Power source off. Description 6 stage adjustment of line monitor

765 Select sound volume 3. (Monitor)

4321 0 Select auto Power source off.

Fixed to 000

0 6 1

MODE 417 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex : 63) Feature Logic 0 1 Meaning 6 No Yes Description Specifies whether # of copies will be restricted. Specifies # of papers when MODE 417 Bit 7 selects Yes.

Restrict # of papers. (Copy)

6543 Selects # of papers to be 210 restricted. (Copy)

000000016 1 99 1100011 Not available Others

8-152

MODE 422 Bit 76

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 08) Feature Logic 00 6 01 10 Others 000 001 6 010 011 100 Others 00 6 01 10 11 Meaning Mode 1 (std) Mode 2 Mode 3 Not available No counting A3 A3/B4 A3/B4/FLS A6 Not available Mode 1 (No counting) Mode 2 (Counting 1) Mode 3 (Counting 2) Not available Not available Description Specifies a counting method of total counter.

Select count mode of total counter.

543 Select count mode of size counter.

Specifies size of paper to be counted by size counter.

21

Select count mode of print kit counter. (Copy)

Specifies whether a copy kit counter and disabled copy function are installed.

0 6 1

Fixed to 0

MODE 423 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Hex : 48) Feature Logic 0 6 1 0 Meaning # of papers # of copy operations Description Specifies the threshold value of copy kit counter and browser counter.

Select key counter mode. (Copy) Key counter installed. (Copy)

1 6 54 3 Document size detection option installed. 00 6 Others 0 1 6

Specifies whether a key Yes counter is installed. (No print allowed) No (Print allowed) Fixed to 00 Not available Yes No Specifies whether document size sensors can be used in the inchoption. Fixed to 000 Not available

210

000 6 Others

8-153

MODE 424 Bit 7

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 0 6 1 Meaning Yes No Description Specifies whether document sizes will be rounded off for the system specification in auto paper mode. Specifies size of FLS.

Metric and inch mixed modes. (Copy)

65

Select FLS size. (Copy)

00 6 01 10 11 0 6 1 0 6 1

210330 203330 216330 220330 Yes No No Yes

Restrict print mode. (Copy)

Specifies whether 2 Sided Copy is disabled in priority copy mode. Specifies whether a warning will be generated when a document smaller than that detectable by document size sensors is loaded. Specifies whether some copy functions (application, doc copy) will be disabled. Fixed to 00

Print small size document. (Copy)

Restrict function. (Copy)

0 6 1

No Yes

10

00 6 Others

Not available

MODE 425 Bit 7654

Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00) Feature Logic 00006 Others 00006 1000 Others Meaning Not available Specifies the density of image at printing. Not available Description Fixed to 0000

3210 Adjust image quality mode. (Copy)

8-154

Chapter 9

TROUBLESHOOTING

9-1. DIAGNOSIS BY ALARM CODE

This section shows diagnoses of system troubles by alarm codes and their remedies. The default setting for diagnostic codes is not to be displayed. If you experience errors frequently, setup the soft switch (MODE 020) to display diagnostic codes. Then follow tables 9-1-1 and 9-1-2 for troubleshooting. Table 9-1-1 shows communication error codes. Each of them has 6-digits on the panel and a report. Codes 00 to B4 indicate the upper 2 digits. Adding internal 4 digits to them to display 6 digits on the panel and a report. Communication reports (TX and RX) print out diagnostic codes for up to 50 activities. Any codes older than those activities cannot be printed. Table 9-1-2 indicates printer alarm codes, which have 2 digits on the panel screen. Before you proceed with a remedy according to the tables, make sure that the power source cable and the connectors are connected properly. < Setting up diagnostic code display > MODE 020 Bit 3 0 1 Meaning Do not display codes. Displays codes.

See Section 8-3-3 Maintenance mode << 5 >> Set up Soft Switch for setting up soft switches.

9-1

9-1-1. COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES

< Errors in operations > Code 00 Description Cause Remedy Reload a document and retry TX. Ask to reload a document and retry TX.

Remote

Line

Local r

Received DIS but 1. Error in operation no document in local terminal 2. Error in operation Polling Reception at remote end is requested Software failure at time of connection Document pulled Error in operation out while transmiting. Document size was too small Illegal dialing oper- Error in setting up ation (Example; dialing or # with DP setting) Error in registration

01

Reload a correct document and retry TX.

02

Check the soft switch (MODE 006 Bit5 & MODE 011 Bit 5). Check the registered one-touch dialing number. Check the group password of both sides. Check the group password of both sides. Check the status of the remote machine and the local password. Check the status of the remote machine. Check the status of the remote machine.

r 03 Mismatched TX password Mismatched RX password Senders password and receivers are not matched. Senders password and receivers are not matched.

04

05

Mismatched pass- Incorrect password word while polling was entered for setting up polling. Remote system has no relay function Failure in remote machine

06

07

Remote system Failure in remote has not confiden- machine tial communication function

9-2

Code 09

Description Incompatibility (Example; no document in local system while polling RX) TX failure due to mismatch of communication type and/or transmission speed

Cause Error in operation on remote side Transmission speeds are set 4800/2400 bps. Remote machine has only V.29.

Remote r

Line

Local

Remedy Ask the remote end to reload the document again. Check the soft switch (MODE 049 Bit 4 -0).

Check the maximum transmission speed for each one-touch dialing (only for registration in maintenance features). Check the status of the remote machine. Check the status of the remote machine.

10

Error in F code TX Failure in remote machine Error in F code RX Failure in remote machine

11

< Terminal alarm > Code 45 Description Memory overflow or nearly full Cause Memory overflows or nearly full Remedy Reset the terminal alarm and ask the remote end for resending. Reload a document. Reload a document. r

Remote

Line

Local r

46

Document jamming

Feeding is not working continuously. Jamming in a long document or in the middle of a page (Feeding is not completed even if feeding exceeds 1m.)

47

No print paper or Out of paper Side cover Side cover was opened were opened during RX detected

r r

Load paper. Close the side cover.

9-3

< Communication errors (TX) > (1/3) Code 33 Description Protocol failure in V.34 sequence Cause Failure in remote machine Line failure 70 Busy tone while Failure in remote waiting for initial machine identification signal Line failure Timeout or modem failure while detecting 2nd dialing tone Cannot dial due to dialing/ringing conflict T1 timeout while waiting for initial identification signal when FAX signal is not detected T1 timeout while Failure in remote waiting for initial machine identification sigLine failure nal after FAX signal is detected Detected reverse polarity while waiting for initial identification signal Received DCN in Interruption or failphase B while wait- ure in remote ing for commands machine other than DCN Received DIS or DTC 3 times while waiting for response to TCF No response even after sending TSI/ DCS and TCF 3 times Received FTT twice even TCF has lowest speed Failure in remote machine Line failure Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) r r Remedy Try another remote machine. r Try another line. Try another remote machine. Try another line.

Remote r

Line

Local

71

Try another remote machine. Try BACK to BACK communication. r

72

Check the remote system and retry TX. Try another remote machine. r Try another line. Replace PKGASSY (MFB)

74

9-4

(2/3) Code 76 Description Cause Remedy Check the remote system and retry TX. If same error will be experienced several times, set the soft switch (MODE 082 Bit 3) 0. Try another remote machine. Try another line. r

Remote r

Line

Local

Reverse polarity Failure in remote while waiting for machine signal other than initial identification Line failure

77

No response to post message (T4 timeout) 5-minute timeout in RNR, RR sequence (T5 timeout) Received DCN while waiting for response to post message

Failure in remote machine No RTC detection in remote machine (line failure)

78

Interruption or failure in remote machine

Check the status of the remote machine and retry TX. Check the status of the remote machine.

79

Received PIP for Failure in remote post message (For machine response to EOP or PPS-EOP, communication is normal even error code is displayed) Received RTN for post message (where RTN reception is regarded as communication failure) Retry out of resending error PPR frame error Failure in remote machine Line failure Failure in TX level

7A

r r

Check the status of the remote machine. Check the line. Check TX level. r

7C

Received CRP 3 Failure in remote times for TCF machine Received CRP 3 Line failure times for post message Received CRP 3 times for DTC of polling reception

Try another remote machine. Try another line. r

9-5

(3/3) Code 7D Description Cause Remedy Check the status of the remote machine. Check the status of the remote machine. Check the status of the remote machine.

Remote r

Line

Local

RX command error Failure in remote (without cutting off machine carrier) No remote Failure in remote machine response machine after changing mode (T1 timeout) Received PIN for post message Failure in remote machine

7F

8F

9-6

< Communication errors (RX) > (1/2) Code 33 Description Protocol failure in V.34 sequence Cause Failure in remote machine Line failure 91 T1 timeout while Failure in remote waiting for initial machine identification signal Line failure Received DCN Interruption or failwhile waiting for ure in remote commands other machine than DCN in phase B Detected low Failure in remote speed flag followed machine by 10 sec. timeout Line failure while waiting for detection of image signal carrier (HMCD ON) Carrier disconnected for 15 seconds while receiving G3 image signal T2 timeout while waiting for post message T2 timeout while waiting for DCN after receiving last page No response from remote system after changing mode (T2 timeout) Error in remote machine Failure in remote machine Line failure Error in remote machine Accidental RTC detection (line failure) r r r r Remedy Try another remote machine. r Try another line. Try another remote machine. Try another line. Check the status of the remote machine and retry TX. Try another remote system. Try another line. r

Remote r

Line

Local

92

95

96

r r r

Ask for resending. Try another remote machine. Try another line. Try another remote machine. Try another line.

97

98

Received DCN Interruption or failure in remote while waiting for machine command other than DCN in phase D

Ask for resending. r

9-7

(2/2) Code 99 Description Cause Remedy Check the status of the remote machine.

Remote

Line

Local

Received PRI-Q as Failure in remote post message machine (Communication is regarded as normal even with error message) Cannot decode line correctly for 35 seconds while receiving ECM image signal Received CRP 3 times while waiting for initial identification signal Failure in remote machine Line failure Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Failure in remote machine Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Line failure

9A

r r r r r r r

Try another remote machine. Try another line. Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Try another remote machine. Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Try another line. Check the status of the remote machine. Try another remote machine. Reduce the initial transmission speed and try resending.

9C

9D

RX command error Failure in remote (without cutting off machine carrier) Interrupted page Failure in remote reception by EOR- machine Q or EOR-PRI-Q Line failure signal from sender in ECM procedure (next page may be received completely because ECM procedure runs continuously )

9F

9-8

< Malfunction > Code B0 Description Power source off Cause Power switch was turned off Power source failure Defective power supply unit B2 System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure and error in sequence timing) Warm restart switch was pressed Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Line failure r B4 Modem failure Document was not loaded for polling reception in V.34 mode Line failure r Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) B5 Modem failure (modem failure in V.8 sequence at RX) Modem failure (modem failure in V.8 sequence at RX) System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure, error in sequence timing) Line failure r Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Line failure r Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Warm restart switch was pressed Failure in PKGASSY (MFB) Line failure r Remedy None. None. Replace the power source supply unit. None. Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Check line noise and reception level. Check the document loaded in the remote side. Check line noise and reception level. r Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Check line noise and reception level. r Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Check line noise and reception level. r r r Replace PKGASSY (MFB) None. Replace PKGASSY (MFB) Check line noise and reception level.

Remote

Line

Local r r r r r

B6

B7

9-9

9-1-2. PRINTER ALARMS (MALFUNCTION)

This section describes the alarm codes, possible causes and countermeasures to be taken. Take proper countermeasures. Some alarm codes may be displayed due to external noises, etc. Before taking countermeasures, turn on and off the main switch to reset the trouble. <Malfunction Resetting Procedure> Turn OFF, then ON the Power Switch or open and close the Side Cover for all malfunctions except fusing-related ones (C05**). << 1 >> Detection Timing by Malfunction Code
Code Description Detection Timing

C0000 Main Motor M2 mal-

function tion
C0045 Fusing Cooling Fan

The Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. period or more while M2 remains energized. period or more while M1 remains energized.

C0010 I/C Motor M1 malfunc- The Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec.

The Lock signal remains HIGH or LOW for a continuous 1Motor M3 malfunction sec. period or more while M3 remains energized. malfunction The Lock signal remains HIGH or LOW for a continuous 1sec. period or more while M8 remains energized.

C004C Ozone Fan Motor M8

C004E Power Source Unit The Lock signal (analog input voltage) remains 0.4V or Cooling Fan Motor M4 less for a continuous 0.5-sec. period or more while M4 remains energized. C0070 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M6 malfunction Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC10 remains blocked (L) for a continuous 2-sec. period or more while M6 remains energized. PC10 remains unblocked (H) for a continuous 6-sec. period or more while M6 remains energized. The temperature of the Fusing Rollers do not reach the required level even after the lapse of a given period of time during a warming-up cycle. From room temperature to 100C: within 65 sec. From 100C to 140C: Within 25 sec. From 140C to 170C: Within 20 sec. From 170C to the completion of warming-up: Within 22 sec. The fusing temperature remains 130C or less for a continuous 0.1-sec. period or more during the standby state or printing. The fusing temperature remains 105C (Di350f) / 80C (Di250f) or less for a continuous 2-min. period or more during the low-temperature standby state. The fusing temperature remains 230C or more for a continuous 0.1-sec. period or more.

C0500 Warming-up failure

C0510 Abnormally low fusing temperature

C0520 Abnormally high fusing temperature

9-10

Code

Description

Detection Timing

C0650 Faulty Scanner Home <The Power Switch is turned ON, Original Cover lowered, Position Sensor 1 or Start key pressed when the Scanner is at its home PC12 position> PC12 is not unblocked (H) even when the Scanner moves 10 mm to the left. PC12 is not blocked (L) even when the Scanner moves 4 mm to the right after PC12 has been unblocked (H). <The Power Switch is turned ON, Original Cover lowered, or Start key pressed when the Scanner is at any position other than home> PC12 is not blocked (L) even when the Scanner moves 469.5 mm to the right. C0651 Faulty Scanner Home When the Start key is pressed with a document loaded in Position Sensor 2 the Document Feed Tray of AF-7, PC13 is not blocked (L) PC13 even when the Scanner moves 463 mm to the left after PC12 has been unblocked (H). C0990 LCC Lift-Up Motor EMOT malfunction (LCC) C0991 Lift 1 ascent motion failure (LCC) C0995 LCC Transport Motor HMOT malfunction (LCC) C0999 Lift 2 ascent motion failure (LCC) C099D Communication error (LCC) The overcurrent detection circuit detects an overcurrent condition that lasts for a given period of time while EMOT remains energized. Lift-Up Sensor 1 LS1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after EMOT has been energized (Lift 1 has started moving up). The HMOT Lock signal is not input for a given period of time. Lift-Up Sensor 2 LS2 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after EMOT has been energized (Lift 2 has started moving up). LCC becomes uncontrollable due to an error in communications between the LCC and main product.

At any time after M1 has been energized, the Lock sigC0B00 Transport Motor M1 nal remains HIGH for a given period of time. drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Fin- At any time after M1 has been deenergized, the Lock isher) signal remains LOW for a given period of time. C0B0F Paper Entrance Switching Motor M1 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail bin Finisher) (In Non-Sort mode) Non-Sort Tray Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC2 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M1 has been energized (to swing the Path Switching Guide downward). (In mode other than Non-Sort) Finisher Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC3 does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M1 has been energized (to swing the Path Switching Guide upward).

9-11

Code

Description

Detection Timing

C0B30 CD Aligning Motor M4 drive malfunction (Finisher/mail-bin Finisher)

CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M4 has been energized (to return the CD Aligning Plate to its home position).

C0B38 Shift Motor M5 drive Shift Sensor PC6 does not go HIGH even after the lapse malfunction (Finisher/ of a given period of time after M5 has been energized (to Mail-bin Finisher) return the Shift Reference Plate to its home position). Paper Holding Tray Home Position Sensor PC9 does C0B4D Paper Holding Tray Motor M10 drive malnot go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of function (Finisher/ time after M10 has been energized (to let the Paper Mail-bin Finisher) Holding Tray start its retracting motion). PC9 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M10 has been energized (to let the Paper Holding Tray start its home-returning motion). Finisher Tray Home Position Sensor PC2 does not go C0B4E Finisher Tray Motor M8 drive malfunction LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after (Finisher/Mail-bin FinM8 has been energized (to let the Finisher Tray start its isher) retracting motion). PC2 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 has been energized (to let the Finisher Tray start its home-returning motion). C0B50 Stapling Motor drive The Home Position Sensor does not go HIGH even malfunction (Finisher/ after the lapse of a given period of time after the StaMail-bin Finisher) pling Motor has been energized (to start a stapling sequence). The Home Position Sensor does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapling Motor has been energized (to start a home-returning motion). C0B80 Shift motion failure (Shift Tray Unit) (When moving from home to shift position) The Shift Home Sensor is blocked after a given period of time after the Shift Motor has been energized (at which timing the motor is deenergized). (When moving from shift to home position) The Shift Home Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Shift Motor has been energized.

Elevator Tray Upper Surface Sensor PC8 does not go C0BA0 Elevator Motor M9 HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after drive malfunction M9 has been energized (to let the Elevator Tray start the (Finisher/Mail-bin Finascent motion). isher) The value of input to Elevator Tray Retract Position Sensor PC12 does not reach the specified level for the trays retracted position even after the lapse of a given period of time after M9 has been energized.

9-12

Code

Description

Detection Timing

C0F32 Faulty ATDC Sensor E1

The value of data read by E1 is faulty. [E1 reading is 7% or less (3.92V or more) or 19% or more (1.41V or less).]

C0F33 ATDC adjustment fail- In an F8 (ATDC control voltage automatic adjustment) ure operation, the adjustment of ATDC control voltage is not completed within 1 min. after E1 sampling. In an F8 operation, the control voltage falls outside the range of 5.39V to 8.15V. C1038 Engine connection error The system fails in checking initial engine connection when Power Switch S1 is turned ON. The system succeeded in checking initial connection when S1 was turned ON; then it fails in rechecking initial connection through the execution of a software reset when a communications error occurs during operation. <Resolution selection failure detection> The Lock signal is not detected for a given period of time after the resolution has been selected. (The Lock signal is not, however, detected for 1 sec. after the start.) <Faulty Lock signal detection> No Lock signals are detected for the 1-sec. period which starts 1 sec. after the first Lock. * First Lock: The first Lock signal following 1 sec. after the selection of start or half speed. <Out-of-timing Lock detection> The Lock signal is not detected for a continuous 0.5sec. period while M10 is in the stabilized turning state (after a Lock has been detected). <Abnormal Lock detection> The Lock signal remains ON for a continuous 5-sec. period while M10 remains deenergized.

C1300 Polygon Motor M10 malfunction

C1330 Communications error (VSYNC) C133A Communications error (G/A) C133B Communications error (option I/F)

C13C0 I/C initialization failure After failing to blow the imaging unit fuse 2 consecutive times, 3.6V or more is detected and the I/C is determined to be new. C13D0 Faulty EEPROM No initial data is written in EEPROM. C13F0 HSYNC detection fail- The SOS rising edge is not detected even after the ure lapse of 0.2 sec. after Polygon Motor M10 has started and laser output started. No SOS rising edges are detected while VIA remains ON.

9-13

<< 2 >> Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code (1) C0000: M2 Malfunction C0010: M1 Malfunction C0045: M3 Malfunction C004C: M8 Malfunction C004E: M4 Malfunction C0070: M6 Malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts I/C Motor M1 Main Motor M2 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor M3 Power Source Unit Cooling Fan Motor M4 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M6 Ozone Fan Motor M8 Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC10 Master Board PWB-A

9-14

C0000 Step 1 2 Check Item Does M2 turn after the malfunction has been reset? Check M2 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1-3 of M2 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset? Does the voltage across PJ1-4 of M2 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset? Result NO NO Action Check various parts for possible overload. Change PWB-A.

YES NO

Change PWB-A. Change M2.

C0010 Step 1 2 Check Item Does M1 turn after the malfunction has been reset? Check M1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ2-3 of M1 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset? Does the voltage across PJ2-4 of M1 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset? Result NO NO Action Check various parts for possible overload. Change PWB-A.

YES NO

Change PWB-A. Change M14.

C0045 Step 1 2 Check Item Does M3 turn after the malfunction has been reset? Check M3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN-8 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC0V to DC24V after the malfunction has been reset? Does the C0045 display persist even after M3 has been replaced with a new one? Result NO NO Action Check the connector and harness between M3 and PWB-A Change PWB-A.

YES

Change PWB-A.

9-15

C004C Step 1 2 Check Item Does M8 turn after the malfunction has been reset? Check M8 for operation. Does the voltage across CN41-3 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC0V to DC24V after the malfunction has been reset? Does the C004C display persist even after M8 has been replaced with a new one? Result NO NO Action Check various parts for possible overload. Change PWB-A.

YES

Change PWB-A.

C004E Step 1 2 Check Item Does M4 turn after the malfunction has been reset? Does the C004C display persist even after M4 has been replaced with a new one? Result YES YES Action Change PWB-A. Change PWB-A.

C0070 Step 1 Check Item After the malfunction has been reset, remove the Rear Lower Cover and block Toner Bottle Cover Sensor PC11. Then, unlocking the Toner Bottle Lock Lever, turn the Toner Bottle a half turn by hand. Does the Toner Bottle turn when PC11 is unblocked (H) with the Toner Bottle Lock Lever kept unlocked? Does the voltage across PJ8-2 of M6 and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 1 is performed again? Is PC10 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O check. Does the input signal value for Toner Bottle Set change between 0 and 1 when the Toner Bottle is turned by hand. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

NO

Check various parts for possible overload.

YES NO YES

Change M6. Change PWB-A. Change PWB-A.

NO

Change PC10.

9-16

(2) C0500: Warming-up Failure C0510: Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature C0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Roller Heater Lamp H1 Fusing Roller Thermistor TH1 Fusing Roller Thermostat TS1 Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse TF1 Side Cover Interlock Switch 2 S3 Power Supply Unit 1 PU1 Master Board PWB-A

C0500, C0510 Step 1 2 Check Item Does H1 turn ON after the malfunction is reset? Is there continuity across CN3-1 and 2 on the Fusing Unit end with CN3 (2P) disconnected? Is there continuity across 1A and 1B, and across 2A and 2B, of S3 when S3 is turned ON? Is the resistance of TH1 (across CN5-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit end) infinity? Is Fuse F2 on PU1 conducting? Result YES NO Action Check TH1 for contamination or installation. Check H1, TS1, and TF1 for continuity. Change S3.

NO

4 5

YES YES NO

Change TH1. Change PU1 or PWB-A. Change the fuse.

9-17

C0520 Step 1 2 3 Is TH1 dirty? Is the circuit across CN5-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit end closed when CN5 (4P) is disconnected? Check Item Is TH1 installed properly? Result NO YES YES NO Action Install TH1 correctly. Clean or change TH1. Change TH1. Change PWB-A or PU1.

9-18

(3) C0650: Faulty PC12 C0651: Faulty PC13 Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 PC12 Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 PC13 Scanner Motor M5 Master Board PWB-A BCR Board BCR HGB Board HGB MFB Board UN2

9-19

C0650, C0651 Step 1 Check Item Is M5 energized? Select the following functions in this order: Service Mode Movement Check Scanner. Then, enter an appropriate value in Absolute Position or Relative Position and energize M5. Is C0650 being displayed? Does the voltage across CN11BCR-1 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 1 is performed a second time and PC12 is unblocked? Does the voltage across CN1BCR-26 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 3 is performed a second time? Does the voltage across CN12BCR-1 on BCR and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when step 1 is performed a third time and PC13 is unblocked? Does the voltage across CN1BCR-27 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 5 is performed a second time? Result NO Action Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change M5, BCR, HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order.

2 3

YES NO NO

Perform steps 3 and 4. Perform steps 5 and 6. Change PC12.

YES NO NO

Change HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order. Change BCR. Change PC13.

YES NO

Change HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order. Change BCR.

9-20

(4) C0990: EMOT Malfunction C0991: Lift 1 Ascent Motion Failure C0995: HMOT Malfunction C0999: Lift 2 Ascent Motion Failure C099D: Communication Error Relevant Electrical Parts LCC Lift-Up Motor EMOT Lift-Up Sensor 1 LS1 Lift-Up Sensor 2 LS2 LCC Main Board PWB-A: LCC Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette Cassette Main Board PWB-A

LCC Transport Motor HMOT Master Board PWB-A

(Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)

3rd Cassette

4th Cassette

(Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)

2nd Cassette (Large Capacity Cabinet)

C0990 Step 1 Check Item Does C0990 reappear even after EMOT has been replaced with a new one? Result YES Action Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

9-21

C0991 Step 1 2 Check Item Is LS1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across CN4A-6 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change to DC5V when LS1 is blocked and to DC0V when LS1 is unblocked? Does ENOT turn when a drawer loaded with paper is slid into the machine? Does the voltage across CN5A-1 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 3 is performed again? Result YES YES Action Perform step 3 and onward. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order. Change LS1. Check gears and couplings for proper engagement and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change EMOT. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

NO 3 YES

YES

NO

C0995 Step 1 Check Item Does C0995 reappear even after HMOT has been replaced with a new one? Result YES Action Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

9-22

C0999 Step 1 2 Check Item Is LS2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across CN4A-9 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change to DC5V when LS2 is blocked and to DC0V when LS2 is unblocked? Does EMOT turn when a drawer loaded with paper is slid into the machine? Does the voltage across CN5A-1 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 3 is performed again? Result YES YES Action Perform step 3 and onward. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), or PWV-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order. Change LS2. Check gears and couplings for proper engagement and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change EMOT. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

NO 3 YES

YES

NO

C099D Step 1 Check Item Does C099D reappear even after PWB-A (LCC) has been replaced with a new one? Result YES Action Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWBA (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

9-23

(5) C0B00 (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Does Transport Motor M1 start turning after Power Switch is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ9A-2 on PWBA and GND DC24V when the Power Switch is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ9A-3 on PWBA and GND DC5V when the Power Switch is turned ON? Does the voltage across PJ9A-3 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after Power Switch is turned ON? Does the voltage across PJ9A-4 on PWB-A and GND remain DC5V while M1 is turning? Result YES Action Check the rollers and gears for overload. If they are okay, go to step 4. Change PWB-A

NO

NO

Change PWB-A

NO

Change PWB-A

NO

Change M1.

(6) C0B0F (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Does the path switching mechanism of the Horizontal Transport Unit go up when the Finisher is connected to the machine? Is the Horizontal Transport Unit connected in position? Is Finisher Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC3 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Horizontal Position)? Is Non-Sort Tray Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC2 operational, as checked through a sensor check (NonSort Position)? Does the voltage across PJ14A-2 on PWB-A and GND instantaneously change from LOW to HIGH when the Finisher is connected to the machine? Result YES Action Change PWB-A.

NO

Place It in position and check the Drive Coupling Lever for correct function. Change PC3.

NO

NO

Change PC2.

YES

Change Paper Entrance Switching Motor M1, or check the M1 drive mechanism. Change PWB-A.

NO

9-24

(7) C0B30 (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Paper Aligning Bar Home)? Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the CD Aligning plate out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the plate start its homereturning motion). Is CD Aligning Motor M4 energized at this time? Result NO Action Change PC5.

YES NO

Change PWB-A or M4. Change PWB-A.

(8) C0B38 (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is Shift Sensor PC6 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Paper Standard Board Home)? Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Shift Reference Plate out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the plate start its homereturning motion). Is Shift Motor M5 energized at this time? Result NO Action Change PC6.

NO YES

Change PWB-A or M5. Change PWB-A.

(9) C0B4D (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is Paper Holding Tray Home Position Sensor PC9 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Assist Tray Home)? Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Paper Holding Tray out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the tray start its homereturning motion). Is Paper Holding Tray Motor M10 energized at this time? Result NO Action Change PC9.

NO YES

Change PWB-A or M10. Change PWB-A.

9-25

(10) C0B4E (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is Finisher Tray Home Position Sensor PC2 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Home)? Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Finisher Tray out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the tray start its home-returning motion). Is Finisher Tray Motor M8 energized at this time? Result NO Action Change PC2.

NO YES

Change PWB-A or M8. Change PWB-A.

(11) C0B50 (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is the Stapling Motor overloaded? Result YES NO Action Check the drive coupling mechanism. Change the Stapling Unit or PWB-A.

(12) C0B80 (Shift Tray Unit) Step 1 2 Check Item Does the shift tray move in the initial operation? Remove the shift motor and rotate the gears. Does the shift tray slide smoothly? Is the control signal sent from the control board to the shift motor? Result YES NO Action Check Step 4. Check for deposited foreign substances or check whether everything is properly mounted. Check the wiring from the control board to the shift motor. If there is nothing wrong, replace the shift motor. Replace the control board. Remove or clean off foreign substances. Replace the control board. Check the wiring from the control board to the shift tray home sensor. If there is nothing wrong, replace the shift tray home sensor.

YES

NO 4 Are there foreign substances or deposits on the shift home sensor and light shielding plate? Is the output signal of the shift tray home sensor input to the control board without any error? YES

YES NO

9-26

(13) C0BA0 (Finisher) Step 1 Check Item Is Elevator Tray Upper Surface Sensor PC8 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Raised)? Is Elevator Tray Retract Position Sensor PC12 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Does the voltage across PJ6A-1 on PWB-A and GND change from LOW to HIGH after the Start key has been pressed in the Sort mode? Result NO Action Change PC8.

NO

Change PC12.

YES

Check the drive coupling mechanism and change Elevator Motor M9. Change PWB-A.

NO

9-27

(14) C0F32: Faulty E1 C0F33: ATDC Adjustment Failure Relevant Electrical Parts ATDC Sensor E1 Master Board PWB-A

C0F32, C0F33 Step 1 2 3 Check Item Are PJ40, CN50, CN17, and PWB-A PJ15A connected properly? Is the CN50 connection dirty? Is C0F32 or C0F33 displayed even when an I/C with the same T/C as that of a new one has been installed? Is C0F32 or C0F33 displayed even when an I/C with the same T/C as that of a new one has been installed and an F8 operation run? (Be sure to record the ATDC control voltage setting value if an F8 operation is to be run.) Result NO YES NO Action Connect them properly. Clean. Replace the I/C with a new one.

YES

Change PWB-A, install the old I/ C, and return the ATDC control voltage setting to the value recorded. If C0F32 or C0F33 is redisplayed, replace the I/C with a new one. Replace the I/C with a new one.

NO

9-28

(15) C10** to C13** These malfunctions are concerned with faulty symptoms as they relate to software, hardware, and communications. For remedial actions, change the board, check for cable connections, and turn the Power Switch OFF and ON.
Code Action

C1038 1. Check the connection between PWB-A and MFB Board (UN2), reset the malfunction, and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, change PWB-A or MFB Board (UN2). C1300 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the harnesses and PJs between UN3, PH Unit, and PWB-A and, if they are intact, change UN3, PH Unit, or PWB-A, in that order. C133A 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the connection between the product PWB-A and A to E below: A. 2nd drawer paper source unit B. 3rd drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette / LCC) C. 4th drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette / LCC) D. 5th drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette) E. Job Tray Unit 1. If the connection is made properly, unplug the connector between the machine and A to E and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. If the malfunction code display persists, change the machine PWB-A. If the malfunction is no longer detected, connect the connectors sequentially and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. When C133A is detected, check the connector of the corresponding paper source unit and, if it is intact, change the PWB-A of the unit. C133B 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the connection between the machine PWB-A and Finisher PWB-A. 3. If the connection is made properly, unplug the connector between the machine and Finisher and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. If the malfunction code display persists, change the machine PWB-A. If the malfunction is no longer detected, check the connector and, if it is intact, change the Finisher PWB-A. C13C0 1. Reset the malfunction, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch, and reinstall the I/C. 2. If the malfunction is detected again, check the terminal block for the I/C fuse and HV1 and, if it is intact, change HV1 or PWB-A. C13D0 1. Reset the malfunction, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch, and unplug the power source cord and plug it back in. 2. If the malfunction is detected again, check the connection between IC3 on PWB-A and the EEPROM and, if it is good, change PWB-A. 3. If the malfunction is still detected, change the EEPROM. * For the precautions to be observed when replacing the EEPROM, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT. C13F0 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the harnesses and PJs between UN3, PH Unit, and PWB-A and, if they are intact, change UN3, PH Unit, or PWB-A, in that order.

9-29

(16) The Product Does not Turn ON. Relevant Electrical Parts Power Switch S1 Side Cover Interlock Switch 1 S2 Power Supply Unit 1 PU1 Power Supply Unit 2 PU2
Symptom Power source does not turn ON. Step 1 Check Item Is there an AC power supply voltage across PJ1PU1-1 and 3 on PU1 when S1 is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ5PU1-10 and GND DC5V when S1 is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ5PU1-4 and GND DC24V when S1 is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ5PU1-3 and GND DC24V when S1 is turned ON? Does the voltage across the S2 connector (yellow) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when S2 is turned ON? Is the voltage across PJ7PU1-9 on PU1 and GND DC3.3V? Is the voltage across CN1PU2-1 on PU2 and GND DC24V? Is the voltage across CN28UN2-8 on UN2 and GND DC12V? Is the voltage across CN28UN2-7 on UN2 and GND DC12V? Is DC24V being output from UN2 to UN1? Disconnect CN1UN1 of UN1 and check to see if the voltage across CN1UN1-1 on the harness side and GND is DC24V. Is DC5V being output from UN2 to UN1? Disconnect CN1UN1 of UN1 and check to see if the voltage across CN1UN1-28 on the harness side and GND, and across CN1UN1-29 and GND, is DC5V. Result NO Action Check S1, PU1 fuse, and Power supply voltage. Check the fuse on PWB-A. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Check S2.

Master Board PWB-A Control Panel UN1 MFB Board UN2

YES NO NO NO NO

3 4 5

6 7 8 9

NO NO NO YES NO NO

Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU2. Change PWB-A. Change PU2. Change UN2.

The control panel indicates nothing.

YES NO

Change UN1. Change UN2.

9-30

9-2. DIAGNOSIS OF DOCUMENT MISFEED

9-2-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED
The following table shows causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies.
Location Misfeed when feeding document Symptom Cause Remedy

Does not feed document Dirty and/or aged auxiliary Clean up rollers. Document pulled rollers Replace rollers. unevenly Does not feed document Motor malfunctions Replace motor. Replace PKG. Replace sensors. Clean up rollers. Remove objects.

Misfeed when scanning Document stopped while Sensors failure document feeding Document stopped while Dirty rollers feeding Aged rollers Document squeezed while feeding Document squeezed while feeding Foreign objects in document

Poor paper quality of docu- Use Book scanner. ment Bad document shape

9-2-2. SENSOR FAILURE

The table below shows possible causes of sensor failure and their remedies. [1] Automatic Document Feeder
Location Misfeed when feeding document Symptom Panel displays no change even after loading document Stops passed over position of scanning without scanning Misfeed when scanning Start and stop reading document positions error Document size error Misfeed when ejecting document Alarm appears on panel while ejecting document Alarm appears on panel after ejecting document Others Door open/close detection error Document cover open/ close detection error Cause Remedy

Failure in document detec- Replace sensors tion sensors (ADF). Failure in reading position sensors Failure in reading position sensors Failure in document size detection sensors Failure in reading position sensors and document detection sensors Failure in reading position sensors and document detection sensors Failure in door open sensors Replace door switch.

Failure in BS lid open/close Replace lead switch. detection sensors

9-31

[2] Book Scanner The following table shows possible causes of mechanical failure of scanning and their remedies.
Symptom Carriage does not move Cause Remedy

Slipping teeth of the timing belt Check the timing belt. Check the fixing screws of the motor plate. Slipping or entangled wires Check wire configuration across the unit. Check the carriage (1) and the wire. Check the spring for wire tension.

Strange sound when the power source is ON/OFF

Carriage bumps inside the unit 1 2

Check the carriage sensor. Replace carriage sensor if failed again. Readjust the wires of the driving pulley of the book scanner to obtain even winding on front and rear sides on the unit.

Holding plate was not removed Remove the holding plate. when unpacking. Dirty copied image when using ADF Cannot read image from Book scanner Dirty parts The precision of the book mirrors was slightly shifted. Make sure the original glass is clean. Check the position of the mirror of the Book scanner. Check the position screws and for foreign objects in the Book scanner. Jammed lense Check Lens ASSY. Check the lenses and CCD. Faulty fuser/fusing of glass parts Make sure the glass is attached to the unit securely. Make sure the white marker is labeled. Lamp is not turned on. Poor Shading Check the inverter cable and the lamp. Check the mirror. Check the white marker label of Glass ASSY. Check the carriage sensors. They may have loose connections. Check the wire winding on the driver drum. Uneven winding should be adjusted. Make sure the Glass ASSY is securely connected. Make sure the CCD cable is securely connected with the connector.

9-32

9-3. DIAGNOSIS OF PRINTER MISFEED

9-3-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED
Possible causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies are shown in the following table. Symptom Cause Remedy Replace with new paper. Adjust the paper guide and reload paper.

Misfeed at feeding Creased or folded papers are paper found in paper cassettes Paper is not loaded properly.

The paper feeder is clogged with Remove the paper slips. paper slips. The paper feeding rollers are worn out. Misfeed at transporting paper Misfeed at fuser/ fusing/ejection The paper transport unit is clogged with paper slips. Replace the feeding rollers. Remove the paper slips and open and then close the side cover.

The fuser/fusing and ejection Remove the paper slips. units are clogged with paper slips. The fuser/fusing rollers are dirty. Replace the right and the left rollers of the fuser/fusing unit.

9-33

9-3-2. ELECTRICAL MISFEED

Possible causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies are shown in the following table. Symptom Cause Remedy Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the paper feeder solenoid or the mechanism control board. Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform normally, replace paper feeding sensors or the mechanism control board. Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the paper feeder driver clutch or the mechanism control board. Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform normally, replace the timing sensors or the mechanism control board. Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the timing clutch or the mechanism control board. Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform0 normally, replace paper eject sensors or the mechanism control board.

Misfeed at feeding Paper feeder solenoid malfuncpaper tion.

Paper feeder sensors malfunction.

Misfeed at transporting paper

Paper driving clutch malfunction. (Feeder driving is not terminated or kept terminated.) Timing sensors malfunction.

Timing clutch malfunction.

Misfeed at fuser/ fusing/paper ejection

Paper eject sensors malfunction.

9-34

9-3-3. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE (INCLUDING OPTIONAL PARTS)

<< 1 >> Paper Misfeed When a paper misfeed occurs, the Touch Panel shows the corresponding message, misfeed location, and paper location. display display
Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at q.

Misfeed location Paper location

Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at q.

Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Misfeed/Paper Location ADFR take-up, ADFR single feed ADFR reverse, ADFR exit ADFR transport ADF take-up, ADF transport Job Tray/Shift Tray transport Job Tray/Shift Tray exit Horizontal transport (Finisher) Finisher transport, 1st Tray exit, Elevator Tray exit Mailbin transport (Mail-bin Finisher) Finisher Tray (Finisher) Separator, Fusing Unit Manual Bypass take-up 2 sided Print Unit turnover, 2 sided Print Unit take-up 1st drawer take-up (Multi-Purpose Cassette) 2nd drawer take-up (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) 3rd drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) 3rd drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) 4th drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) 4th drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) 5th drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette) 5th drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette)

Ref. Page [4] (7)

[4] (8)

[4] (9)

[4] (3) [4] (2) [4] (6) [4] (1) [4] (4) [4] (4) or (5) [4] (4) or (5) [4] (4) or (5) [4] (4) or (5) [4] (4) [4] (4)

* If a communication error occurs between UN2 (MFB BOARD) and PWB-A during a print cycle, it forces a paper misfeed condition ( displayed on the Touch Panel). If that happens, check the circuit between UN2 and PWB-A for proper connection and, if it is intact, replace the board.

9-35

<Resetting the Display> Misfeed in the machine Remove all sheets of paper misfed and left inside, and then open and close the Side Cover. Misfeed in the option Remove all sheets of paper misfed and left inside, and then raise and lower or disconnect and reconnect the option.

* If the misfeed display is not reset by these procedures, check the misfeed detecting sensor at the paper location. [1] Misfeed Detection Sensor Layout

Paper Exit Sensor PC3

2 sided Print Unit Transport Sensor Pl1

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8

[2] Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings The following are the types of misfeed detection and detection timings for different misfeed locations. <Main Machine Take-Up Misfeed> Type Paper take-up failure detection Detection Timing Timer Value T (sec.)

1st drawer paper take-up: Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) 0.92 (Di350f) even after the lapse of T sec. after Paper Take-Up Sole1.28 (Di250f) noid SL1 has been energized for the second paper takeup retry sequence. 2nd drawer paper take-up: PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. 1.63 (Di350f) after SL1 has been energized for the first paper take-up 2.27 (Di250f) retry sequence. 1st/2nd drawer paper take-up: PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after SL1 has been energized. 0.20

9-36

<Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed> Type Bypass Paper take-up failure detection Paper left Detection Timing PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after T sec. after Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 has been energized. PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after CL3 has been energized. Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8 is blocked (L) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed. Timer Value T (sec.) 0.64 (Di350f) 0.89 (Di250f) 0.20

<Separator Misfeed> Type Leading edge detection by Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Trailing edge detection by Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Paper is stationary Detection Timing PC3 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of T sec. after PC2 has been unblocked (H). Timer Value T (sec.) 1.38 * (Di350f) 1.92 * (Di250f) 3.02 * (Di350f) 4.20 * (Di250f) 0.75 (Di350f) 1.05 (Di250f)

PC2 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of T sec. after it has been unblocked (H). PC2 is blocked (L) within T sec. after it has been unblocked (H). During a sequence of detecting a paper size based on the period of time between when Synchronizing Clutch CL1 is energized and when PC2 is blocked (L), the paper size detected is longer than the size data sent from the controller by +260 mm or more. The paper size detected based on the period of time between when CL1 is energized and when PC2 is blocked (L) is more than the size data sent from the controller by 20 mm or more. PC2 is unblocked (H) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

Paper error detection

Paper left

* Excludes the period of time during which the paper is stationary before the Synchronizing Roller.

9-37

<Fusing Misfeed> Type Trailing edge detection by Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Paper left Detection Timing PC3 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after PC2 has been blocked (L). Timer Value T (sec.) 1.41 (Di350f) 1.96 (Di250f)

PC3 is blocked (L) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

<2 Sided Print Turnover/Take-Up Misfeed> Type Leading edge detection during 2 Sided Print transport Paper take-up failure detection Detection Timing 2 Sided Print Transport Sensor Pl1 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after Paper Exit Sensor PC3 has been unblocked (H). PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after the 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has been started. PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after the 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has been started. Paper left Pl1 is blocked (H) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed. Timer Value T (sec.)

1.52

0.88

0.20

9-38

[3] Optional Part Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings (1) Universal cassette/500-sheet cassette Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Additional 1st drawer Take-Up Sensor Additional 2nd drawer Take-Up Sensor Additional 3rd drawer Take-Up Sensor

Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings Type Paper left in path Detection of paper stopped at Take-Up Sensor Detection Timings The output from Take-Up Sensor S3 is blocked (L) when the copier Power Switch is turned ON or a misfeed is reset. Additional 1st to 3rd drawer The period of time counted during which Take-Up Sensor S3 remains blocked (L) is equivalent to +260 mm longer than the recognized paper length. Additional 1st to 3rd drawer Take-Up Sensor S3 is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Solenoid SL1 has been energized (after two paper take-up retry sequences).

Paper take-up failure detection

9-39

Type

Detection Timings

Vertical transport paper Additional 1st drawer leading edge detection Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the Additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L). Additional 2nd drawer 1. Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the 2nd drawer has been blocked (L). 2. PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L). Additional 3rd drawer 1. Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 2nd drawer is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the 3rd drawer has been blocked (L). 2. S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 2nd drawer has been blocked (L). 3. PC2 is not unblocked within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L). Size error detection * The detection described on the right is also made during a 2 sided print cycle. Additional 1st to 3rd drawer The period of time counted from when Take-Up Sensor S3 is blocked (L) to when it is unblocked (H). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recognized is more than 20 mm.

9-40

(2) Large capacity cabinet (LCC) Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Additional 1st drawer Take-Up Sensor (S3) Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1

Registration Sensor RSEN

Paper Standby Position Sensor S1

9-41

 Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings Type Paper left Lift 1 paper take-up failure detection Lift 2 paper take-up failure detection Detection Timings The output from Registration Sensor RSEN is blocked (H) when the Copier Power Switch is turned ON or a misfeed is reset. Paper Standby Position Sensor S1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Clutch 1 P1CL has been energized. Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Clutch 2 P2CL has been energized. S1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after P1CL has been energized. Registration Sensor paper leading edge detection Registration Sensor paper trailing edge detection RSEN is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Separator Clutch BCL has been energized (after two paper take-up retry sequences). RSEN is not unblocked (L) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been energized.

Vertical transport paper LCC only: leading edge detection Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been turned ON Additional 1st drawer + LCC: Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been turned ON. Size error detection LCC only: The period of time is counted from when Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL1 is energized to when Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is blocked (L). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recognized is more than 20 mm. Additional 1st drawer + LCC: The period of time is counted from when Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is blocked (L) to when it is blocked (H). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recognized is more than 20 mm.

* The detection described on the right is also made during a 2 sided print cycle.

9-42

(3) 2 sided print unit (Duplexing unit) Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout

Paper Exit Sensor PC3

2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor Pl1

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings Type Paper left Detection Timings The output from 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor PI1 is blocked (L) when the Copier Power Switch is turned ON or a misfeed is reset. 1. Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is unblocked (H) at a shorter than normal time after a 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has started. 2. Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after a 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has started. 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor PI1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Paper Exit Sensor PC3 has been unblocked (H).

Paper take-up failure

Paper leading edge detection during transport through 2 Sided Print Unit

9-43

(4) 2 sided document feeder (ADFR, Duplexing document feeder) When a misfeed or malfunction is detected in the ADFR, the corresponding code as detailed below is shown on the copier Touch Panel. In addition, the LEDs on PWB-A of the ADFR blink or remain OFF, as detailed below, to indicate the type of misfeed malfunction. C A B
Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at q.

Touch Panel Code, LED indication, and Detection Timing of Each Misfeed/Malfunction
Touch Panel Code LED Indication Description Detection Timing

Document not reach- PC2 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1025 ing Registration Sen- msec. after Take-Up Motor M2 has been enersor PC2 gized. Document staying at Registration Sensor PC2 Document staying at Single Feed Empty Sensor PC9 Pick-Up Motor M1 malfunction PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of 1010 msec. after Main Drive Motor M3 has been energized. PC9 is not unblocked even after the lapse of 2125 msec. after Main Drive Motor M3 has been energized. Pick-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 is not blocked or unblocked even after the lapse of 1000 msec. after M1 has been energized.

Document left (before When an original is loaded in the Document operation is started) Feed Tray with all closures in the closed position, a sensor in the document path is blocked. Document left (after operation is started) Exit Sensor PC3 is blocked before the original is positioned after it has been taken up.

Document not reach- PC3 is not unblocked even after the lapse of ing Exit Sensor PC3 1205 msec. after Main Drive Motor M3 has been energized. Document staying at Exit Sensor PC3 C PC3 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1225 msec. after M3 has been energized.

Document not reach- PC4 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1215 ing Turnover Sensor msec. after M3 has been energized (to turn forPC4 ward). Document staying at PC4 is not unblocked even after the lapse of 995 Turnover Sensor PC4 msec. after M3 has been energized (to turn backward).

(Blinking :

OFF :

9-44

(5) Job tray unit/shift tray unit Misfeed Detection A paper misfeed is detected under any of the following conditions, causing a misfeed display to be given on the copier control panel. Type Transport misfeed Paper left Exit misfeed Detection Timings The Upper Exit Sensor is not blocked within a given period of time after the Paper Exit Sensor of the copier has been blocked. The Upper Exit Sensor is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON or a paper misfeed is reset. The Upper Exit Sensor is not unblocked within a given period of time after the Paper Exit Sensor of the copier has been unblocked.

(6) Finisher/mail-bin finisher Location of Misfeed Detecting Sensors

Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 Paper Sensor PC1

Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7 Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensor PQ PWB-B

2nd to 5th Bin Empty Sensor PWB-D

Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensor LED PWB-C

9-45

 Misfeed Detection A. When a misfeed occurs, the Touch Panel of the copier gives the misfeed message, showing the misfeed location and places where paper exists. B. The misfeed display may be canceled by opening and closing the door of the Finisher.
Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at .

2 3 6 5

10

11 13 12 14

15 17 16 19 18 21 20

Blinking ON Display No. 7 Category Horizontal Transport Unit misfeed Finisher transport section misfeed

Where a misfeed occurs Where paper exists Detection Timing

Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Exit Sensor PC3 of the copier.

Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked

(H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) it. 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit. Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit. 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 is not unblocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (H) PC1. Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7 is not unblocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after a stapling sequence has been completed. The Stapling Motor does not start turning backward even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has started turning forward.

1st Tray exit misfeed Print set exit misfeed Staple misfeed Mail-bin transport misfeed

8 8 9

Mail-bin Paper Exit Sensor PWB-B/C or 2nd-5th Bin Empty Sensor

PWB-D is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1. Mail-bin Paper Exit Sensor PWB-B/PWB-C is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) it.

10

Finisher Tray exit misfeed

Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 is not unblocked (L) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (H) it.

9-46

[4] Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures (1) Copier take-up misfeed Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Master Board PWB-A Cassette Main Board PWB-A

(Cassete Main Board)

PJ13A-6A(GND) PJ13A-7A(PC2 ON) PJ13A-8A(DL5V)

9-47

PJ13A-13B(SL1 ON) PJ13A-12B(DC24V) PJ13A-11B(CL2 ON) PJ13A-10B(DC24V)

2nd Cassete

<Copier Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Paper is not taken up at all. Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet the product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications Change the paper. Instruct the user on the storage of paper. Slide the guides to the exact size of the paper. Clean or change the Paper Take-Up Roll. Clean or change the Paper Lifting Plate. Check steps 7 and 8. Check steps 9 and onward. Clean or change the Paper Separator Pad. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1. Change PWB-A. Clean or change the Paper Separator Finger. Change PWB-A.

YES

Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop (of the drawer) positioned to the exact size of the paper used? Is the Paper Take-Up Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? If the Paper Lifting Plate dirty or deformed? Has the misfeed been detected while the Multi Purpose Cassette was being used? Is the Paper Separator Pad deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across CN19-1on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed? Is the Paper Separator Finger dirty or deformed? Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed? Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ3A-1A on PWB-A (Cassette Main Board) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when the Start key is pressed?

NO

4 5 6

YES YES YES NO YES YES

7 8

NO YES NO

9 10

11

YES

Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1 or CL2. Change PWB-A (Cassette Main Board) or PWB-A. Clean or change the Vertical Transport Roller. Clean or change the Vertical Transport Guide Plate. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2.

NO YES

Paper is at a
stop before the vertical transport section. Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

Is the Vertical Transport Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? If Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

2 3

YES YES

NO

9-48

(2)

Manual bypass take-up misfeed Relevant Electrical Parts

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8 Master Board PWB-A

3500 CN43

9-49

< Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Paper is not taken up at all. Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet the product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user on the shortage of paper. Clean or change the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roller or Roll. Change the PC8 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC8. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change CL3. Change PWB-A. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2

YES

Is the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is PC8 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Check CL3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN14-2 and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the misfeed condition is reset? Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES

NO

YES

NO YES

Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

NO

9-50

(3)

Separator/fusing misfeed Relevant Electrical Parts

Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Synchronizing Clutch CL1 Master Board PWB-A

9-51

< Separator/Fusing Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers. Step 1 Check Item Are the Synchronizing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is a good length of loop formed before the Synchronizing Rollers? Result YES Action Clean or change the Synchronizing Rollers. Select the following functions in this order: Service Mode Service Choice Printer Loop Adjustment and make the loop adjustment. Check that the size of the paper actually loaded in the current paper source matches the size set for it. Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change CL1. Change PWB-A. Clean or change the guide plate. Clean or change the Image Transfer Roller. Clean or change the separator fingers. Check the clearance between the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers and PC Drum. Clean or change the Fusing Guide Plate. Clean or change the Fusing Rollers. Clean, correct, or change the Fusing Separator Fingers. Clean or change the Paper Exit Roller. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check the PC3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC3.

NO

Is a size error displayed when the misfeed display is reset?

YES

Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Check CL1 for operation. Does the voltage across CN6-9 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed? Is the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Is the Image Transfer Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Are the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers dirty or deformed?

NO

YES

NO YES YES YES NO

Paper is at a stop near the PC Drum.

1 2 1

Paper is wedged at the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.

Paper is at a stop before the Fusing Rollers. Paper is at a stop at the Fusing Rollers.

Is the Fusing Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Are the Fusing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Are the Fusing Separator Fingers dirty or deformed? Is the Paper Exit Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is PC3 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES

1 2

YES YES

Paper is at a stop at the exit section.

1 2

YES YES

NO

9-52

(4)

Paper take-up/transport misfeed (Universal cassette/500-sheet cassette) Relevant Electrical Parts

Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL1 Take-Up Sensor S3

Master Board PWB-A Cassette Main Board PWB-A

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/500sheet Cassette Transport Clutch CL2

9-53

< Paper Take-Up/Transport Misfeed (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Paper is not taken up at all. Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet the product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications Change the paper. Instruct the user on the storage of paper. Slide the guides to the exact size of the paper. Clean or change the Paper Take-Up Roll. Clean or change the Paper Lifting Plate. Clean or change the Paper Separator Finger. Change PWB-A.

YES

Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop (of the drawer) positioned to the exact size of the paper used? Is the Paper Take-Up Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is the Paper Lifting Plate dirty or deformed? Is the Paper Separator Finger dirty or deformed? Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed? Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ13A-1A on PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500sheet Cassette) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when the Start key is pressed?

NO

4 5 6 7

YES YES YES NO

YES

Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1 or CL2. Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

NO

9-54

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Is the Vertical Transport Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is the Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Is a size error displayed when the misfeed display is reset?

Result YES

Action Clean or change the Vertical Transport Roller. Clean or change the Vertical Transport Guide Plate. Check that the size of the paper loaded in the current drawer matches the size set for that drawer. Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board). Check the S3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change S3.

Paper is at a
stop at the vertical transport section. Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

2 3

YES YES

* A misfeed is detected at the transport section of the 3rd drawer. Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Are all S3s fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across PJ13A-2B on PWB-A side (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette) and GND change to DC0V when S3 is blocked and to DC5V when S3 is unblocked?

NO

YES

YES

NO

9-55

(5)

Paper take-up/transport misfeed (LCC) Relevant Electrical Parts

Take-Up Clutch 1 P1CL Take-Up Clutch 2 P1CL Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1 Separator Clutch BCL Registration Clutch RCL Registration Sensor RSEN

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Transport Clutch CL2 Take-Up Sensor S3 Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette Cassette Main Board PWB-A Master Board PWB-A

Paper Standby Position Sensor S1 LCC Main Board PWB-A

9-56

< Paper Take-Up/ Transport Misfeed (LCC) Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet the product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user on the shortage of paper. Clean or change the Paper Take-Up Roll. Perform steps 6 and onward.

Paper is not Paper is at a

taken up at all. stop before the Paper Feed/ Separator Rolls.

YES

3 4

Is the Paper Take-Up Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is PPS1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across CN3A-2 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when PPS1 is blocked?

YES YES

YES

Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette), or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order. Change PPS1. Perform steps 8 and onward.

NO 6 Is paper fed up to S1 when paper is loaded in Lift 2 only and the drawer is slid into the Copier Check P2CL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-6 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when step 6 is performed again? YES

YES

Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change P2CL. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order. Perform steps 11 and onward.

NO

Check P1CL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-8 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when step 6 is performed again? Is S1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the S1S input signal change from 0 to 1 when the drawer loaded with paper is slid into the Copier? Does the voltage across CN3A-5 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when step 9 is performed again?

NO

YES

10

YES

Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette),or PWBA (Cassette Main Board), in that order. Change S1. Clean or change the Paper Feed Roll or Separator Roll.

NO 11 Is the Paper Feed Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? YES

9-57

Symptom

Step 12

Check Item Check BCL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-2 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the start key is pressed?

Result YES

Action Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change P1CL or BCL. Change PWB-A(LCC), PWBA (Universal Cassette/500sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order. Clean or change the Vertical Transport Roller or Roll. Check step 4 and onward.

NO

Paper is at a
stop in the vertical transport section. Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is RSEN fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across CN4A-2 on the PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when RSEN is blocked?

YES

YES

YES

Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette),or PWBA (Cassette Main Board), in that order. Change RSEN. Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/ 500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order. Change PWB-A.

NO 4 Check RCL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-4 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed? Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the start key is pressed? * If the 3rd drawer is LCC Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. NO

NO

YES

Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change RCL, CL2, or PWB-A, in that order. Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change RCL, CL2, or PWB-A, in that order. Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board). Check the S3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change S3.

NO

* If the 4th drawer is LCC Is S3 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the voltage across PJ3A-2B on the PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500sheet Cassette ) and GND change to DC0V when S3 is blocked and to DC5V when S3 is unblocked ?

YES

YES

NO

9-58

(6)

2 sided (Duplex) print unit turnover/take-up misfeed Relevant Electrical Parts

Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Switchback Motor M1

2 Sided Print Unit Transport Motor M2 Master Board PWB-A 2 Sided Print Unit Main Board PWB-A

2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor P11 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3

9-59

< 2 Sided Print Unit Turnover/Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>

Symptom Paper is at a stop near the exit section. Step 1 2 Check Item Is the Paper Exit Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is PC3 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Check M1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1A-7 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle? Does the voltage across PJ1A-5 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle? Result YES NO Action Clean or change the Paper Exit Roller. Check the PC3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC3. Check gears for proper engagement. Change PWB-A.

YES NO

YES

Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change M1 or PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board). Change PWB-A. Clean or change the 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Roller or Roll. Remove the torn piece of paper. Clean or change the Manual Feed Take-Up Roller or Roll. Check gears for proper engagement. Change PWB-A.

NO Paper is at a stop inside the 2 Sided Print Unit. 1 Is the 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is a torn piece of paper present on the paper path surface? Is the Manual Feed Take-Up Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check M2 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1A-3 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle? Is PI1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Check CL3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN14-2 and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when paper is taken up from the 2 Sided Print Unit? Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. YES

2 3

YES YES

YES NO

NO

Check the PI1 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board). Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change CL3 or M2. Change PWB-A. Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A. Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2.

YES

NO YES

Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

NO

9-60

(7) 2 sided (Duplex) document feeder (ADFR) misfeed Misfeed troubleshooting procedures 1. Check the code shown on the Touch Panel. 2. Check the LED indication to identify the detail or the misfeed. 3. Determine the problem. 4. Perform the check procedures according to the problem. Document not reaching registration sensor PC2
Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Has the capacity of the Document Feed Tray been exceeded? Is any of the Take-Up Rolls, Pick-Up Rolls, or Separator Pads deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Are the Pick-Up Rolls pressing the document? Carry out a unit check of Take-Up Motor M2 to determine if it is operational. Carry out a sensor check of PC2 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ9A-11 on the PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC2 is blocked with a sheet of paper? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Instruct the user not to exceed the capacity. Clean or replace the defective part. Check the pick-up mechanism. Replace PWB-A. Replace M2. Replace PWB-A. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC2.

The original is
not taken up at all. The original is stationary before PC2.

2 3

YES YES

4 5

NO YES NO YES YES NO

The original has

been transported to PC2.

1 2

9-61

 Document staying at registration sensor PC2

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is the Registration Roller deformed, worn, or dirty? Carry out a unit check of PC2 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ9A-11 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when PC2 is changed from the blocked to unblocked state with a sheet of paper? Is the Transport Belt worn, or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is any of the Take-Up Rolls,Pick-Up Rolls, or Separator Pads deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the Registration Roller. Go to step 5. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC2.

The trailing
edge of the original does not move past PC2.

2 3 4

YES YES YES NO

5 6 7

YES YES YES NO NO

Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Replace PWB-A. Replace M3. Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the defective part.

Two or more
originals are taken up at once.

YES

9-62

 Document staying at single feed empty sensor PC9

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Carry out a unit check of PC9 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ9A-14 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when PC9 is changed from the blocked to unblocked state with a sheet of paper? Is the Transport Belt worn, or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Go to step 4. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC9.

The original is
not taken up at all. The trailing edge of the original does not move past PC9.

2 3

YES YES NO

4 5 6

YES YES YES NO

Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Replace PWB-A. Replace M3.

Misfeed detected when document is loaded or immediately after start key has been pressed.
Problem Step No. 1 2 3 Check Item Is there an original left in the ADFR? Is the felt paper of Registration Sensor PC2 dirty or separated? Carry out a unit check of each sensor placed along the document path to determine if it is operational. Result YES YES YES NO Action Remove the original. Clean or replace the felt paper. Replace PWB-A. Replace defective sensor.

An ADFR misfeed is displayed on the Touch Panel when a document is loaded in the Document Feed Tray. An ADFR misfeed is displayed on the Touch Panel immediately after the Start key has been pressed.

9-63

 Document not reaching exit sensor PC3

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is the Transport Belt worn or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a sensor check of PC3 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC3 is blocked with a sheet of paper? Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Go to step 6. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC3.

The original is
stationary before PC3.

2 3 4 5

YES YES YES YES NO

YES NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M3.

Document staying at exit sensor PC3

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is the Transport Belt worn or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a sensor check of PC3 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when PC3 is changed from the blocked to unblocked state with a sheet of paper? Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Go to step 6. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC3.

The trailing
edge of the original does not move past PC3.

2 3 4 5

YES YES YES YES NO

YES NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M3.

9-64

 Document not reaching turnover sensor PC4

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is the Transport Belt worn or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a sensor check of PC4 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ3A-5 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC4 is blocked with a sheet of paper? Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Go to step 6. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC4.

The original is
stationary before PC4.

2 3 4 5

YES YES YES YES NO

YES NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M3.

Document staying at turnover sensor PC4

Problem Step No. 1 Check Item Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feeding? Is the Turnover Roller deformed, worn, or dirty? Is the Transport Belt worn or dirty? Is the Original Glass dirty? Carry out a sensor check of PC4 to determine if it is operational. Does the voltage across PJ3A-5 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC4 is blocked with a sheet of paper? Carry out a unit check of Turnover/ Exit Motor M4 to determine if it is operational. Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is operational. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding. Clean or replace the Turnover Roller. Clean or replace the Transport Belt. Clean or replace the Original Glass. Go to step 7. Replace PWB-A. Replace PC4.

The trailing
edge of the original does not move past PC4.

2 3 4 5 6

YES YES YES YES YES NO

YES NO YES NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M4. Replace PWB-A. Replace M3.

9-65

Problem

Step No. 1 2

Check Item Does the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate operate abnormally? Carry out a unit check of Turnover/ Exit Switching Solenoid SL1 to determine if it is operational.

Result YES YES NO

Action Replace the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate. Replace PWB-A. Replace SL1.

The original is
caught by the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate.

(8) Job tray unit/shift tray unit misfeed Misfeed troubleshooting procedures
Step Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the Transport Guide Plate dirty? Result Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. to store the paper.

1 2 3 4 5

NO

YES Change the paper. Instruct the user in how YES Remove the foreign matter and clean the
guide plate. Change the Transport Roller. Check the wiring between the Main Board and Transport Motor and, if it is intact, change the motor. Check the position of the Upper Exit Sensor installation and check the actuator for deformation and contamination. Change the Main Board Check the wiring between the Main Board and Upper Exit Sensor and, if it is intact, change the sensor.

Is the Transport Roller deformed or worn? YES Does the Transport Motor operate properly? Does the actuator of the Upper Exit Sensor operate properly? Is the Upper Exit Sensor output signal properly applied to the Main Board?

NO

NO

YES NO

9-66

(9) Finisher/mail-bin finisher Troubleshooting procedures 1) Horizontal transport unit misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? Are the rollers in the transport section dirty, deformed, or worn? Is Paper Sensor PC1 of the Horizontal Transport Unit operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES YES NO Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. Clean or change the defective roller. Change PWB-A. Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC1.

9-67

2) Finisher transport section misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? Are the rollers in the transport section dirty, deformed, or worn? Does the voltage across PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after a given period of time after the Start key has been pressed in the Non-Sort/Hole Punch mode? Is 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Is Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES YES NO Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. Clean or change the defective roller. Make a stroke adjustment of Upper Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 or change SL1. Change PWB-A.

6 7

NO YES NO

Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC1. Change PWB-A. Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC3.

3) 1st tray exit misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? Are the rollers in the transport section dirty, deformed, or worn? Is 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES YES NO Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. Clean or change the defective roller. Change PWB-A. Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC1.

4) Print set exit misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? Is Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES NO Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. Change PWB-A. Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC7.

9-68

5) Mail bin transport misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? A print is stationary at the entrance to the bin. A print is stationary near the entrance to the bin inside the Finisher. Does the voltage across PJ10A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after the lapse of a given period of time after the setting has been made to feed prints into the Mail Bin and the print cycle has been started? Does the voltage across each of the following pins and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after the lapse of a given period of time after the setting has been made to feed prints into the Mail Bin and the print cycle has been started? 1st Mail Bin: PJ10A-4 on PWB-A 2nd Mail Bin: PJ10A-6 on PWB-A 3rd Mail Bin: PJ10A-8 on PWB-A 4th Mail Bin: PJ10A-10 on PWB-A Are Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensors PWB-B/ C and 2nd-5th Bin Empty Sensor PWB-D operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. To step 8. To step 7. Make a stroke adjustment of Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 or change SL2. Change PWB-A.

YES NO

Change 1st-4th Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid SL3-6. Change PWB-A.

YES NO

Change PWB-A. Change PWB-B, PWB-C, or PWB-D.

6) Finisher tray exit misfeed

Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? Is the paper transport path dirty with foreign matter or deformed? Is Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 operational, as checked through a sensor check? Result NO YES YES YES Action Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part. Change PWB-A.

7) Staple misfeed
Step 1 2 Check Item Is the Stapling Unit installed properly? Is an overload being applied to the Stapling Motor? Result NO YES NO Install it properly. Check the drive coupling mechanism. Change the Stapling Unit or PWB-A. Action

9-69

9-4. DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOMS

Possible causes of various problems and their remedies are shown below. Carry out troubleshooting according to this table.

Note Print out the service call report and activity reports (TX/RX) to understand the system settings and status before replacing boards or the system entirely, or correct a failure.

Item No. 1

Symptom No Panel display 1

Cause Is the power switch on?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Turn on the power switch.

Is the wall outlet live? YES Go to item 3. Can the wall outlet supply NO Check the electrical path to the wall the rated power to the outlet. (Check the rated power.) system? Did you experience a special power failure? (Example; The voltage was going down slowly.) Is the fuse blown? YES Turn off the power switch and leave the system for at least 90 seconds. Then turn on the power switch. NO Go to item 4. YES Replace the PSU. NO Go to item 5.

Do you have the output voltage of +24V from pin 2 of the cable side when you disconnect CN28 of the MFB board? (GND uses pin 1.) Do you have the output voltage of +5V at CN1628 of MFB board? (GND uses CN16-30)

YES Go to item 6. NO Check the cable between PSU and MFB. Replace the power supply unit if necessary. YES Go to item 7. NO Check the cable between PSU and MFB.

Do you have the output YES Go to item 8. voltage of +5V at CN1-28 NO Check the cable between AOP and of AOP board? (GND MFB. uses CN1-30.) Do you have the output YES Go to item 9. voltage of +24V at CN1-1 NO Check the cable between AOP and of PKG AOP board? MFB. (GND uses CN1-30.) Do you have the output voltage of -16 to -7V at CN2-12 of AOP board ? (GND uses CN2-5.) YES Go to item 10. NO Replace AOP board.

10 Do you have the output YES Go to item 11. voltage of +24V at CN7-1 NO Replace AOP board. of AOP board? (GND uses CN7-2.) 11 Does Panel display after replacing the cable between AOP and INVPKG? YES Check the cable between AOP and INV-PKG. NO Go to item 12.

9-70

Item No.

Symptom

Cause 12 Does Panel display after replacing INV-PKG? 13 Does Panel display after replacing LCD panel unit? 14 Does Panel display after replacing AOP board? 15 Does Panel display after replacing MFB board?

Remedy YES Replace INV-PKG. NO Go to item 13. YES Replace the LCD panel unit. NO Go to item 14. YES Replace AOP board NO Go to item 15. YES Replace MFB board YES END NO Go to item 2. YES Go to item 3. NO Fix the screws tightly. YES Adjust the distance between the Cover Switch and the Take-Up Cover. NO Go to item 4.

Panel displays Door open.

Close the specified door once again to see if the display will go. Is the cover secured tightly? Will the display go if you push the Cover Switch? (AFR-7)

Will the display be gone if YES Insert the connector between MFB you surely insert connecand the PWB-A. tor between MFB board NO Go to item 5. and the PWB-A? Is the display gone after replacing ACR board? Is the display gone after replacing HGB board? Is the display gone after replacing the PWB-A? YES Replace ACR board. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 7. YES Replace the PWB-A.

9-71

Item No. 3

Symptom No Document is displayed even when a document is loaded. 1

Cause

Remedy

Does the level of CN5-20 YES Replace HGB board and Go to item 3. of HGB board indicate NO Go to item 3. +0V when the document empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF? Does the level of CN1-20 YES Replace the cable between ACR and of ACR board indicate HGB. +0V when the document NO Go to item 3. empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF? Does the level of CN5-7 of ACR board indicate +0V when the document empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF? Single-sheet feeding mode? Thin document or fabricated paper? Do you use a carrier sheet? Any improvement if you use a carrier sheet? YES Replace ACR board. NO Replace document empty sensors.

Experiencing docu- 1 ment misfeeding frequently. 2

YES Go to item 2. NO Go to item 5. YES Go to item 3. NO Go to item 13. YES Go to item 13. NO Go to item 4. YES END NO Go to item 13.

Do you load more sheets YES Go to item 6. than the specified paper NO Go to item 7. capacity? Any improvement if you YES END load less sheet than the NO Go to item 7. specified paper capacity? Thin document or fabricated paper? Any improvement with the single paper feeding mode and the carrier sheet? YES Go to item 8. NO Go to item 9. YES END NO Go to item 13.

Is the document curled or YES Go to item 10. creased? NO Go to item 13. YES END NO Go to item 13.

10 Any improvement without curl? With single sheet feeding mode and the carrier sheet? 11 Is the document fed into the machine? 12 Is the document ejected from the machine?

YES Go to item 12. NO Go to item 13. YES Go to item 23. NO Go to item 24.

9-72

Item No.

Symptom

Cause

Remedy

13 Are Take-Up rollers rotat- YES Go to item 16. ing? NO Go to item 14. 14 Are gears rotating? YES Coupling failure in Take-Up roller gears. NO Go to item 15. 15 No more misfeeding after YES Replace the Main-motor. replacing the MainNO Go to item 17. motor? 16 Is the torque of separator YES Go to item 21. rollers proper while NO Replace separator rollers. idling? 17 Do you have the voltage of +24V at CN10-1 of ACR board? YES Go to item 18. NO Check the cable between ACR and PSU (including the fuse). If the cable is OK, replace PSU.

18 Is the display gone after YES Replace the cable between HGB and replacing the cable ACR. between HGB and ACR? NO Go to item 19. 19 Do you have the voltage YES Replace ACR board. of +5V at CN5-29 of HGB NO Go to item 20. board? 20 Do you have the voltage YES Replace HGB board. of +5V at CN12-5 of HGB NO Go to item 21. board? 21 Is the display gone after YES Replace the cable between MFB and replacing the cable HGB. between MFB and HGB? 22 Is the document detection sensor fixed properly? 23 Does the actuator (arm) of document empty sensors move? 24 Does the actuator (arm) of registration sensor move? 25 Is there any obstacle on the document transfer path. YES Go to item 23. NO Fix it properly. YES Go to item 24. NO Replace document empty sensors. YES Go to item 25. NO Replace registration sensor. YES Remove them. NO Go to item 26.

26 Does the level of CN5-20 YES Go to item 28. of HGB board indicate NO Go to item 27. +0V when the document detection sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF? 27 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing the document empty sensor unit? YES Replace document empty sensors. NO Go to item 29.

9-73

Item No.

Symptom

Cause

Remedy

28 Does the level of CN5-21 YES Go to item 30. of ACR board indicate NO Go to item 29. +0V when the document edge detection sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF? 29 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing ACR board? YES Replace ACR board. NO Go to item 33.

30 Are Take-Up rollers dirty? YES Clean up Take-Up rollers. NO Go to item 31. 31 Are separator rollers dirty? 32 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing separator rollers? 33 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing HGB board? 34 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing MFB board? 5 No TX marker stamps on document 1 Is TX marker ON? (Do you have TX marker option?) YES Clean up separator rollers. NO Go to item 32. YES Replace separator rollers. NO Replace the transport unit. (ADF) YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 34. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 30. YES Go to item 2. NO Turn ON TX marker. (Install TX marker option.)

Does TX marker have ink YES Go to item 3. in it? NO Replace TX marker. Any improvement after replacing TX marker? YES Replace TX marker. NO Go to item 4.

Are there any disconnec- YES Replace TX marker. tions or damage on TX NO Go to item 5. marker cable? Is the voltage of +24V supplied to CN10-1 of ACR? YES Go to item 6. NO Check the cable between ACR-PSU (including the fuse). If the cable is OK, replace PSU.

Any improvement after YES Replace the cable between HGB and replacing the cable ACR. between HGB and ACR? NO Go to item 7. Any improvement after replacing ACR board? Any improvement after replacing HGB board? YES Replace ACR board. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 8.

9-74

Item No. 6

Symptom Document pulled unevenly 1

Cause Is the document set guide adjusted properly? Are documents with different sizes loaded together? Is there any obstacle on the document transfer path? Is the document loading tray attached properly?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Adjust it properly. YES Set documents with different sizes properly. (See Operators manual.) NO Go to item 3. YES Remove them. NO Go to item 4. YES Go to item 5. NO Attach it properly.

Are split rollers worn out? YES Replace separator rollers. NO Go to item 6.

No faulty movements in the auxiliary rollers?

YES Check the auxiliary rollers and replace them as necessary. NO Go to item 7.

Do the Exit rollers locate at the correct position?

YES Go to item 8. NO Place them in the correct position.

Does the system become YES Replace the scanner unit. normal after replacing the scanner unit? Is the document thin? YES Use the carrier sheet. NO Go to item 2. Are there any obstacle on YES Remove them. the document transfer NO Go to item 3. path? Is document creases at ADF unit? YES Replace Exit rollers. NO Go to item 4.

Document is easily 1 creased or torn up. 2

Is document creases at YES Go to item 5. the entrance of the docuNO Go to item 7. ment transfer path? Is the document loading tray attached properly? Any deformation along the document transfer path? Are Exit rollers and their fuser/fusing panels OK? Are Exit rollers dirty? YES Go to item 6. NO Attach it properly. YES Replace the scanner unit. NO Go to item 7. YES Go to item 8. NO Attach them correctly. YES Clean up the rollers

9-75

Item No. 8

Symptom Displays an alarm Call Service Personnel C0651/ C0651 to indicate the failure of the scanner unit 1

Cause Is the connector of BCR board inserted properly?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Fix it properly.

No damage on the cables YES Replace the cables. around BCR board? NO Go to item 3. Is the connector of HGB board inserted properly? YES Go to item 4. NO Fix it properly.

No damage on the cables YES Replace the cables. around HGB board? NO Go to item 5. Are home position sensors fixed tightly? No faulty performance of home position sensors? Are the connections between the shaft of book scanner and the motor OK? YES Fix them. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace the sensors. NO Go to item 7. NO Go to item 8.

Does the system become YES Replace BCR board. normal after replacing NO Go to item 9. BCR board? Does the system become YES Replace HGB board. normal after replacing NO Go to item 10. HGB board? YES Replace cables/fix connectors.

10 No loose connections or damage in other cables and connectors? 9 Display shows Out 1 of print paper. 2 Is paper loaded correctly?

YES Go to item 2. NO Reload it correctly.

Do you have electrical YES Go to item 3. continuity along the cable NO Replace the cable between the paper between the paper empty empty sensor and the PWB-A. sensor and the PWB-A? No loose cables of the PPC engine at the rear side of the system YES Fix the loose cables. NO Go to item 4.

Is the display gone after YES Reinsert the connector between MFB reinserting the connector the PWB-A. between MFB board and NO Go to item 5. the PWB-A? Is the display gone after replacing the PWB-A? Is the display gone after replacing MFB board? YES Replace the PWB-A. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace MFB board?

9-76

Item No. 10

Symptom Frequent paper misfeeds 1

Cause Is paper clogged in the print paper transfer section of the printer?

Remedy YES Remove the clogged paper. NO Go to item 2.

Do you have electrical YES Go to item 3. continuity along the cable NO Replace the cable between the synbetween the synchronizchronizing roller sensor and the PWBing roller sensor and A. PWB-A? No loose cables of the PPC engine at the rear side of the machine YES Fix the loose cables. NO Go to item 4.

Is the display gone after YES Reinsert the connector between MFB reinserting the connector and the PWB-A. between MFB board and NO Go to item 5. the PWB-A? Is the display gone after replacing the PWB-A? Is the display gone after replacing MFB board? Reload paper properly, and make more than 10 copies. Is paper still skewed? Is the paper drawer set properly? Is paper skewed in copy operation? YES Replace the PWB-A. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace MFB board? YES Go to item 2. NO END

6 11 Paper is skewed excessively. 1

2 12 Skewed printing 1

NO Set the drawer properly. YES Check document and paper loading. NO Go to item 2.

Is the document from the YES Go to item 3. service center skewed? NO Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.) Any improvement after replacing MFB board? YES Replace MFB board.

9-77

Item No. 13

Symptom Black stripes on paper 1

Cause Do those lines appear in the copy mode?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.) YES Wipe up dust. NO Go to item 3. YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 5. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 6. YES Clean up the fuser. NO Go to item 7.

Any dust on mirrors and original glass? Any improvement after replacing HGB board? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Is the fuser dirty?

6 14 Completely black 1

Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A? Black pages even in the copy mode?

YES Replacing the PWB-A. YES Go to item 2. NO Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.) YES Go to item 9. NO Go to item 3. YES Go to item 4. NO Check the cable between BCR-PSU (including the fuse). If it is OK, replace PSU.

Is the lamp ON while copying? Is the voltage of +24V supplied to CN14-1 of BCR?

Are the connections YES Go to item 5. between CN2, CN3 of NO Connect them properly. HGB and CN12, CN13 of MFB OK? Does the cable of item 4 bend too much? (Radii less than 25 mm) Any improvement after replacing the cable connecting INV-PKG, BCR, and HGB. Any improvement after replacing INV-PKG? Any improvement after replacing the light source? YES Replace the cable of the item 4. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace the cable connecting INVPKG, BCR, and HGB. NO Go to item 7. YES Replace INV-PKG. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace the light source. NO Go to item 9.

9-78

Item No.

Symptom 9

Cause Any improvement after replacing BCR board?

Remedy YES Replace BCR board. NO Go to item 10. YES Replace the cable between HGB and CCD. NO Go to item 11. YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 12. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 13. YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and PPC.

10. Does the cable have damage between HGB and CCD? 11 Any improvement after replacing HGB board? 12 Any improvement after replacing MFB board? 13 Any bad connections between MFB board and the PWB-A? 15 Stains 1

Stains in the copy mode? YES Go to item 2. NO The transmission document from the remote terminal may be a colored document or a photo.

Is paper loaded properly? YES Go to item 3. NO Load print paper properly.

Using the specified type of paper?

YES Go to item 4. NO Use the specified type of paper.

Is the fuser unit set prop- YES Go to item 5. erly? NO Set the fuser unit properly. Any improvement after replacing the imaging unit? YES Replace the imaging unit.

9-79

Item No. 16

Symptom No printing at all 1

Cause Any printing in the copy mode?

Remedy YES Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.) NO Go to item 2.

Any improvement after replacing the imaging unit?

YES Replace the imaging unit. NO Go to item 3.

Any improvement after YES Replace the cable between CCD and replacing the cable HGB. between CCD and HGB? NO Go to item 4. Are the connections YES Go to item 5. between CN2, CN3 of NO Connect them properly. HGB and CN12, CN13 of MFB OK? Does the cable of item 4 bend too much? (Radii less than 25 mm) YES Replace the cable of item 4. NO Go to item 6.

Any improvement after YES Replace the cable between HGB and replacing the cable MFB. between HGB and MFB? NO Go to item 7. Any improvement after replacing HGB board? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any bad connections between MFB board and the PWB-A? YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 9. YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and PPC. NO Go to item 10. YES Go to item 11. NO Insert the connector properly. YES Replace the PH unit. NO Go to item 12. YES Replace the PWB-A. NO Replace the machine. YES Go to item 4. NO Go to item 2. YES Replace the optical cables. NO Go to item 3.

10 Is the connector of the PH unit properly inserted? 11 Any improvement after replacing the PH unit? 12 Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A? 17 Distorted images or 1 shifted character positions while 2 printing Image distortions in the report printing? Any improvement after replacing the (optical) cables between CN2, CN3 (HGB) and CN12, CN13 (MFB)? Any improvement after replacing HGB board? Any improvement after replacing MFB board?

YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 4. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 5.

9-80

Item No. 17

Symptom Distorted images or 5 shifted character positions while printing 6 Received image is 1 stretched with ADF

Cause Any bad connections between MFB board and the PWB-A? Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A?

Remedy YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and the PWB-A. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace the PWB-A. YES Go to item 2. NO Failure in remote terminal (improper document handling, error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).

18

Printed image is excessively stretched in the copy mode? Note: The following causes may be possible (improper document handling): special paper such as very thick paper, non-carbon print paper, carbon print paper. 2

Is an image from the ser- YES Go to item 3. vice center also NO Go to item 5. stretched? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A? Is the contact of feed roller gears OK? Any paper dust on main rollers or feed rollers? Is the pulling out force of feed rollers normal? Printed image is excessively shrunk in the copy mode? YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 4. YES Replace the PWB-A. YES Go to item 6. NO Replace the feed roller gear unit. YES Clean up rollers. NO Go to item 7. NO Replace the leaf spring. YES Go to item 2. NO Failure in the remote terminal (improper document handling, error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).

4 5

7 19 Received image is shrunk too much. 1

Is an image from the ser- YES Go to item 4. vice center also shrunk? NO Go to item 3. Any improvement after checking the reading unit? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A? YES END NO Go to item 4. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 5. YES Replace the PWB-A.

9-81

Item No. 20

Symptom Received image is too light or faded. 1

Cause Are copied image or a test image also too light or faded? Note: The following causes may be possible (improper setting of document contrast): a document with small blue characters or file lines 2 Any improvement after replacing the imaging unit?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Failure in the remote side (improper setting of document contrast, improper document handling, poor line condition, and error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).

YES Replace the imaging unit. NO Refer to item 9-8 Image quality problem.

21

Received image is squeezed

Are characters of copied YES Failure in the remote side (improper image or a test image setting of document contrast, and also squeezed? error in the transmission unit of the Improper setting of docuremote terminal). ment contrast: Received NO Go to item 2. image of small characters or blue copies with contrast switch set Darker. Error in remote machine: The following causes are possible: (a) Failure in board of scanner unit (b) Improper adjustment of optical focus (c) Condensation on optical lenses (Proceed to anti-dew.) 2 Any improvement after replacing the imaging unit? No improper operation? YES Replace the imaging unit. NO Go to item 4. YES Refer Operators manual for operation. NO Go to item 2. 2 Can adjust timing? YES Go to item 3. NO Replace MFB board. 3 Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Is an alarm message on screen? YES Replace MFB board. YES Correct the failure and reset the alarm. NO Go to item 2. Is the external telephone on-hook? YES Go to item 3. NO Set the external telephone off-hook then press the communication switch.

22

Clock malfunctions

23

Neither Sending 1 nor Receiving are displayed. 2

9-82

Item No. 23

Symptom Neither Sending 3 nor Receiving are displayed. 4

Cause Are you printing something such as report?

Remedy YES Proceed to communication after completing print jobs. NO Go to item 4.

Any improvement after replacing AOP board? Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Is the password checked? Is the password correct?

YES Replace AOP board. NO Go to item 5. YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace MFB board. YES Go to item 2. NO Go to item 3. YES Disable password check and Go to item 3. NO Match the password.

24

Cannot go to Sending nor Receiving modes

Try to communicate with YES Go to item 4. the service center. Same NO END problem? Possible causes are line trouble, trouPossible causes: ble or improper operation in the (a) FAX button is not remote terminal, or the remote FAX is pressed. not connected. (b) Both systems are in the transmission (or reception) mode. 4 Are the transmission level YES Go to item 5. and equalizer of the serNO Set them properly. vice center set properly? Did you check the mode (TX or RX) of the remote side? Any improvement after replacing PKG ASSY (NCUK)? Any improvement after replacing the cable between NCUK and MGB. Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing AOP board? YES Go to item 6. NO Confirm it by phone. YES Replace PKG ASSY (NCUK). NO Go to item 7. YES Replace the cable between NCUK and MGB. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 9. YES Replace AOP board. NO Go to item 10. YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB.

10 Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB.

9-83

Item No. 25

Symptom Automatic reception 1 disabled 2

Cause Did you select the automatic reception mode? Is the external telephone on hook? Any improvement after replacing PKG ASSY (NCUI)?

Remedy YES Go to item 2. NO Select the automatic reception mode. YES Go to item 3. NO Set the external telephone on-hook. YES Replace PKG ASSY (NCUI). NO Go to item 4.

Any improvement after YES Replace the cable between NCUI and replacing the cable MFB. between NCUI and MFB. NO Go to item 5. Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing AOP board? Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB. Is the external telephone off-hook? Is the line type specified correctly? YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace AOP board. NO Go to item 7. YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB. YES Go to item 2. NO Set the handset on-hook. YES Go to item 3. NO Specify the line type (PB, 10, 20 PPS) correctly. YES Go to item 5. NO Go to item 4.

26

Cannot send dial 1 number from 10 key pad 2

Dial by 10 key?

Did you register the phone number? Any improvement after replacing PKG ASSY (NCUK)? Any improvement after replacing the cable between NCUK and MFB. Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing AOP board? Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB.

YES Go to item 5. NO Register the phone number. YES Replace PKG ASSY (NCUK). NO Go to item 6. YES Replace the cable between NCUK and MFB. NO Go to item 7. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace AOP board. NO Go to item 9. YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB.

9-84

Item No. 27

Symptom Cannot monitor communication 1

Cause Is the sound volume switch OFF?

Remedy YES Select a sound volume switch other than OFF. NO Go to item 2.

Is S/W DIP SW set to line YES Go to item 3. monitoring? NO Set S/W DIP SW. Any improvement after replacing the speaker? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? Any improvement after replacing AOP board? Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB. Do you see an obstacle or paper slip in moving parts? Does it happen with a transmission operation? Anything interfering with the transport unit? Anything interfering with rollers or roller axes? Does the main-motor (ADF) generate irregular sound? Are rollers stiff? YES Replace the speaker. NO Go to item 4. YES Replace MFB board. NO Go to item 5. YES Replace AOP board. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB. YES Remove them. NO Go to item 2. YES Go to item 3. NO Go to item 7. YES Remove it. NO Go to item 4. YES Remove it. NO Go to item 5. YES Go to item 6. NO Go to item 7. YES Make them smooth. NO Go to item 7.

28

Strange sound

Does it happen while printing? Anything interfering with the transport unit? Does the fan rotate smoothly?

YES Go to item 8. NO Go to item 9. YES Remove it. NO Go to item 9. YES Go to item 10. NO Replace fan. YES Replace HGB board. NO Go to item 11. YES Replace the PWB-A.

10 Any improvement after replacing HGB board? 11 Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A?

9-85

Item No. 29

Symptom Image memory 1 (memory stored for TX image) is not (1) backed up.

Cause

Remedy

Proceed to the following YES Normal procedure. Is the image NO Go to item 2. memory backed up? TX: Disconnect the line cable and start a quick memory transmission. Turn OFF the power switch while waiting for the answer. Turn ON the power and check if data is stored in the image memory. (2) RX: Turn OFF the power switch while starting memory reception without paper. Turn ON the power again and check if data is stored in the image memory. Is the connector of MFB board connected? YES Go to item 3. NO Connect the connector.

Is the voltage of +12 V YES Go to item 4. between CN 18-14 (MFB) NO Go to item 5. and AG (TP21) normal? (+11.4 to +12.6 V) Is the battery voltage appropriate? (6.85 V or more) Any improvement after replacing PKG ASSY (PSU)? Is the battery fully charged? (Approx. 4hr) Any improvement after replacing the battery? Any improvement after replacing MFB board? YES Go to item 8. NO Go to item 6. YES Replace PKG ASSY (PSU). NO Go to item 4. YES Go to item 7. NO Charge the battery. YES Replace the battery. NO Go to item 8. YES Replace MFB board.

9-86

9-5. CHECKPOINTS FOR TROUBLE IN ANALOG UNITS

Use the following checkpoints and waveforms for troubleshooting analog units. <<1>> Printer Signal Waveform Checkpoint: MFB board CN15-A15 [1] Waveform
V1

V2

[2] Specification V1: 4.0 1.0 V (white pixel) V2: 0 0.8 V (black pixel) <<2>> Communication Analog Signal Waveform [1] Transmission <1> Checkpoint: MFB board TP1 (A) Waveform

0V

V1

(B) Specification V1: approximately 1.5 Vp-p <2> Checkpoint: MFB board IC80-13 pin (A) Waveform

0V

V1

(B) Specification V1: approximately 1.1 Vp-p (when the transmission power source is -9dBm)

9-87

[2] Reception < 1 > Checkpoint: MFB board IC80-13 pin (A) Waveform

0V

V1

(B) Specification V1: approximately 1.6 Vp-p when 0 dBm approximately 14 mVp-p when -43 dBm < 2 > Checkpoint: MFB board TP2 (A) Waveform

0V

V1

(B) Specification V1: approximately 1.6 Vp-p when 0 dBm approximately 14 mVp-p when -43 dBm

9-88

<<3>> Image Memory Backup Signal Waveform Checkpoint: MFB board IC61-11 pin

Note Observe the waveform while connecting the battery.

[1] Procedure Proceed with memory reception without paper. After this step, turn OFF the power switch and then turn it ON again. Check the change in the waveform during the OFF-ON step. [2] Waveform
V1

V2 While backing up

OFF

ON

[3] Specification V1: 4.0 - 6.0 V (Battery voltage) V2: 0 V

9-89

9-6. WARM RESTART

<<1>> Overview Use the warm restart function when you run the maintenance mode or you cannot use the switches on the control panel due to some error (in the transmission, the reception, or the copy modes). If you push the warm restart button, the status of the machine will be initialized. However, the document and the data stored in the internal memory are maintained. After initializing the machine, start processing the stored document (except a copied document and PC print document). <<2>> How to Operate Warm Restart Press the switch inside the small hole that is located on the side of the control panel. <<3>> Warm Restart Steps Activate warm restart by pushing the switch described in << 2 >>. At this moment, all displays on the panel will disappear. After about 5 seconds, warm restart is completed and the initial screen of the panel will be displayed. After this initialization, start processing the stored document. Control Pane

Utility

Mode Check

Pause

Fax

Copy

1 4 7 *

2 5 8 0

3
Access

6 9 # C
Stop Panel Reset
Interrupt

Start

Use a pencil or a pin to push the button inside small hole that is located on the side.

9-90

9-7. CLEARING RAM UNCONDITIONALLY

<<1>> Overview Use this function when warm restart does not work. <<2>> Operation of Unconditional RAM Clear (1) Turn OFF the power switch. (2) Remove the upper cover and the shield so that you can access MFB board. (3) Short the 2 pins of U6 on the MFB board with a metal object like a clip. Turn ON the power switch with the 2 pins shorted. (Be careful not short other parts.) With this procedure, the system clears RAM and brings up the initial screen. (4) Make sure that RAM has been cleared. Then turn OFF the power switch. (5) Remove the clip and reattach the shield and the upper cover. (6) Input the data that was cleared by BBRAM all clear. <<3>> Steps of Unconditional RAM Clear With the procedure in << 2 >>, all data stored in BBRAM will be cleared. Data to be cleared Serial number Image information Time Soft switch information Service call information Accumulated number of pages Bulletin board information Model type Management information per business section Self information PC printer function setup Remote side data Communication activity information

Mechanism adjustment information Copy function data

Short these 2 pins

U6

CN2

CN9 CN8 CN7

MFB board

9-91

9-8. LOW-SPEED MODE SELECTING SWITCH

<<1>> PPM switching Board (PWB-L) Use this function when warm restart does not work.
Symbol S1 Name Low-Speed Mode Selecting Switch Description Used to make longer the paper-to-paper intervals as a means of preventing the problem in which sheets of paper are fed out untidily when large size paper left to stand under high humidity condition is being used. *Keep this switch in the H position, as it is only for special users.

9-92

9-9. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS

If you experience poor image quality, you need to determine whether it comes from failure in the document scanning unit or in the printer unit. Run the test print routine to identify the cause of the problem. If the problem is due to the printer unit, identify the error pattern of the test sample for trouble shooting according to the table below. Notice that the table does not list bad connections among connector and cables. You need to check the connection of the connectors and the cables before replacing parts.
Error Pattern Completely white (Blank page) Cause Empty toner Lack of exposure Lack of development 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 Error in paper size detection 1 2 Remedy Check the toner. Replace the toner bottle if no toner. Replace the printer head. Replace the mechanism control board. Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit. Replace the imaging unit. Replace the high voltage unit. Replace the mechanism control board. Check the paper guide plate of the feeder drawer. If an irregular size of paper is loaded, use a regular size of paper instead or use the multipurpose cassette and enter the size data. Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit. Replace the high voltage unit. Replace the mechanism control board. Replace the imaging unit. Replace the printer head. Replace the mechanism control board

Completely black (Black page)

Failure in charging (No charging)

1 2 3 4

Lack of exposure

1 2

Image contrast too light Lack of transfer

1 2 3

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

4 5 Lack of development 1 2 3 4 Lack of laser power 1

Use new paper. Check the cable connection at the transfer output of the high voltage unit. Check the number of pages that passed the transfer rollers. If it is near lifetime, replace the rollers. Replace the high voltage unit. Replace the mechanism control board. Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit. Replace the imaging unit. Replace the high voltage unit. Replace the mechanism control board. Replace the printer head.

9-93

Error Pattern Darkeed background

Cause Failure in photosensitive drum Failure in charging (No charging) 1

Remedy Check the number of pages that passed through the imaging unit. If it is near lifetime, replace the unit. Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit. Replace the high voltage unit. Replace the mechanism control board. Replace the imaging unit. Replace the printer head. Check scratches on the photosensitive drum. Replace the imaging unit if you find scratches. Clean up the inside. Check if toner has spilt from the toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge if some toner has spilt. Check the fuser left roller. If it is dirty, replace it. (Replace the right roller also or replace the fuser unit.) Check if there are foreign objects on the photosensitive drum. If there is, replace the imaging unit. Replace paper with new paper. Check the transfer roller for an obstacle. Check the transfer roller for flaws. Replace the roller if it has flaws.

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Background scatter

1 2 3 4

Error in laser output power source Scratches on photosensitive drum

1 1

Dirty interior of the machine 1

A
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
White vertical lines

Spilt toner

Dirty fuser left roller

White spots/character Foreign objects attached to voids photosensitive drum Lack of transfer

1 2 3

Clogging at blade

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Stains on backside

Check the developing sleeve. If you see toner attached on it, replace the imaging unit. Replace the printer head.

Dirty lenses/mirrors inside the printer head

Interior of the machine is dirty Dirty transfer rollers

1 1

Clean up the inside. If there is some improvement after printing a few pages, repeat printing until the backside is clean. Replace transfer rollers. Check the fuser right roller. If it is dirty, replace it. (Replace the left roller also or replace the fuser unit.)

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

2 Dirty fuser right roller 1

9-94

Copyright 1999 MINOLTA Co., Ltd. Printed in Japan

Use of this manual shoul be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTACo., Ltd.

1167-7990-11 99090850 11563